Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 394

Reference Manual

2130 RBM Consultant Pro®


Laser Alignment
Analyzer and Fixtures

Part # 97191 Rev. 1


Copyright FAX: 32/16/74.14.19
© 2007 by Emerson Process Management. emacust@emersonprocess.com
All rights reserved. Asia Pacific
No part of this publication may be reproduced, trans- Emerson Process Management Asia Pacific Pte Ltd
mitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or
translated into any language in any form by any means 1 Pandan Crescent
without the written permission of Emerson Process Singapore 128461
Management. Phone: 65.67708706

Disclaimer FAX: 65.67708006


This manual is provided for informational purposes. MHM-TechSupport@AP.EmersonProcess.com
EMERSON PROCESS MANAGEMENT MAKES NO WAR-
RANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, Worldwide Web:
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WAR-
RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PAR-
http://www.MHM.AssetWeb.com
TICULAR PURPOSE. Emerson Process Management shall
AMS Machinery Manager Reference Manual
not be liable for errors, omissions, or inconsistencies
that may be contained herein or for incidental or con- This document was written, illustrated, and produced
sequential damages in connection with the furnishing, by Emerson Process Management’s Engineering Publi-
performance, or use of this material. Information in this cations Group on Power Macintosh™ workstations
document is subject to change without notice and does using Adobe™ FrameMaker®, Adobe PhotoShop®, and
not represent a commitment on the part of Emerson Macromedia® FreeHand™. Printed copies are produced
Process Management. The information in this manual is using the Xerox™ DocuTech™ publishing system.
not all-inclusive and cannot cover all unique situations.
Trademarks and Servicemarks
Product Support Emerson Process Management logo; Infranalysis; Infra-
Should you have any comments on this documentation Route; MachineView; MotorView; Nspectr; OilView
or questions concerning the Agreement on the fol- (Japan); AMS Machinery Manager; Reliability-Based
lowing pages, please contact Emerson Process Manage- Maintenance, and logo; are registered trademarks of
ment’s Product Support Department. Emerson Process Management.

Addresses: PeakVue; RBMview; AMS Machinery Manager (Aus-


tralia, China, Japan); RBMwizard; Reliability-Based
The Americas and Canada Maintenance (Venezuela); SonicScan; SST; VibPro; and
Emerson Process Management VibView are pending trademarks of Emerson Process
835 Innovation Drive Management.
Knoxville, TN 37932 USA Lubricant Profile and Trivector are registered service-
marks of Emerson Process Management.
Phone: 865-675-4274
RBM; AMS Machinery Manager (China); Reliability-
FAX: 865-218-1416
Based Maintenance (Venezuela); and design are
mhm.custserv@emersonprocess.com pending servicemarks of Emerson Process Manage-
Europe and Middle East ment.
Emerson Process Management Adobe is a trademark and FrameMaker and PhotoShop
Research Park Inerleuvenlaan 50 Leuven 3001 are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems, Inc. Power
Belgium Macintosh is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. Mac-
romedia is a registered trademark and FreeHand is a
Phone: 32/16/74/.14.71
trademark of Macromedia, Inc. Xerox and DocuTech
UK 441516779418 are trademarks of Xerox Corporation.

ii
All other brand or product names are trademarks or reg- up to any applicable maximum number of licensed
istered trademarks of their respective companies. users. You may not relicense the Software or use the
Software for third party training, commercial time shar-
Patents ing, rental, or service bureau use. Client may not use the
The product(s) described in this manual are covered Software in, as, or with an ASP (Application Service Pro-
under existing and pending patents. vider).

License Agreement
Software Updates
IMPORTANT: CAREFULLY READ ALL THE TERMS
CSI agrees to provide you, at no charge except for
AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT BEFORE
media, preparation and shipping charges, for one (1)
OPENING THE PACKAGE OR PROCEEDING WITH
year from the date of purchase, all updates to the soft-
INSTALLATION. OPENING THE PACKAGE OR COM-
ware made at the sole discretion of CSI. Should you pur-
PLETING THE INSTALLATION INDICATES YOUR
chase a software support agreement for the next
ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS
succeeding year following the first year from the date of
CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT.
purchase, and thereafter on an annual basis, and if CSI
is still providing support, you may purchase the same,
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS AND CON- annually, at the then existing rate.
DITIONS CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT, .
CANCEL ANY INSTALLATION AND PROMPTLY
RETURN THIS PRODUCT AND THE ASSOCIATED Updates/Upgrades
DOCUMENTATION TO CSI, AND YOUR MONEY Upon receipt of new CSI software replacing older CSI
WILL BE REFUNDED. NO REFUNDS WILL BE GIVEN software, you have 30 days to install and test the new
FOR PRODUCTS WITH DAMAGED OR MISSING CSI software on the same or a different device. At the
COMPONENTS. end of the 30-day test period, you must both remove
and return the new CSI software or remove the older CSI
software.
Definition of Software
As used herein, “software” refers to any computer pro- Ownership
gram contained on any medium. Software includes
The licensed software and all derivatives are the sole
downloadable firmware for use in devices such as ana-
property of Computational Systems, Inc. You may not
lyzers or MotorStatus units and it includes computer
disassemble, decompile, reverse engineer or otherwise
programs executable on computers or computer net-
translate the licensed program. You may not distribute
works.
copies of the program or documentation, in whole or in
part, to another party. You may not in any way distort, or
Software License otherwise modify the program or any part of the docu-
mentation without prior written consent from CSI.
You have the non-exclusive right to use this software on
only one device at a time. You may back-up the soft- Transfer
ware for archival purposes. For network systems, you
You may transfer the software and license to another
have the non-exclusive right to install this software on
party only with the written consent of CSI and only if the
only one server. Read/write access is limited to the num-
other party agrees to accept the terms and conditions of
ber of concurrent use licenses purchased. The number
this Agreement. If you transfer the program, you must
of guest-only accesses is up to a maximum of 250.
transfer the documentation and any backup copies or
transfer only the documentation and destroy any
CSI grants you a non-exclusive right to use the Software
backup copies.
solely for your own internal data processing operations
on the CSI designated supported operating platform for

iii
Copyright technical data and/or the direct product of it to other
The software and documentation are copyrighted. All countries, including, without limitation, the U.S. Export
rights are reserved. Administration Regulations.

Termination U.S. Government Rights


If you commit a material breach of this Agreement, CSI When provided to the U.S. government, the computer
may terminate the Agreement by written notice. software and related materials and documentation are
provided subject to the same license rights as those enu-
Virus Disclaimer merated above.
CSI uses the latest virus checking technologies to test all
its software. However, since no antivirus system is Hardware Technical Help
100% reliable, we strongly advise that you use an anti- 1. Please have the number of the current version of
virus system in which you have confidence to verify the your firmware ready when you call. The version
software is virus-free. CSI makes no representations or of the firmware in Emerson Process Management’s
warranties to the effect that the licensed software is CSI 2100 series, CSI 2400, and other analyzers
virus-free. appears on the power-up screen that is displayed
when the analyzer is turned on.
2. If you have a problem, explain the exact nature of
NO WARRANTY your problem. For example, what are the error
THE PROGRAM IS PROVIDED "AS-IS" WITHOUT messages? When do they occur? Know what you
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR were doing when the problem occurred. For
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY example, what mode were you in? What steps did
WARRANTIES OR MERCHANTABILITY you go through? Try to determine before you call
whether the problem is repeatable.
OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Hardware Repair
Emerson Process Management repairs and updates its
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY AND REMEDIES hardware products free for one year from the date of
IN NO EVENT WILL CSI BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY purchase. This service warranty includes hardware
THIRD PARTY FOR ANY DAMAGES, improvement, modification, correction, recalibration,
INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, update, and maintenance for normal wear. This service
OR OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL warranty excludes repair of damage from misuse,
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR THE abuse, neglect, carelessness, or modification performed
INABILITY TO USE THIS PROGRAM. by anyone other than Emerson Process Management.
After the one year service warranty expires, each return
of a Emerson Process Management hardware product is
THE LICENSEE'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY IN subject to a minimum service fee. If the cost of repair
THE EVENT OF A DEFECT exceeds this minimum fee, we will call you with an esti-
IN WORKMANSHIP OR MATERIAL IS mate before performing any work. Contact Emerson
EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE REPLACEMENT OF Process Management’s Product Support Department for
THE DISKETTES OR OTHER MEDIA. IN NO information concerning the current rates.
EVENT WILL CSI'S LIABILITY EXCEED THE PUR-
CHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT.
Export Restrictions
You agree to comply fully with all laws, regulations,
decrees and orders of the Unites States of America that
restrict or prohibit the exportation (or re-exportation) of

iv
Obsolete Hardware Returning Items
Although Emerson Process Management will honor all 1. Call Product Support (see page 2) to obtain a return
contractual agreements and will make every effort to authorization number. Please write it clearly and
ensure that its software packages are “backward com- prominently on the outside of the shipping
patible,” to take advantage of advances in newer hard- container.
ware platforms and to keep our programs reasonably 2. If returning for credit, return all accessories
small, Emerson Process Management reserves the right originally shipped with the item(s). Include cables,
to discontinue support for old or out-of-date hardware software diskettes, manuals, etc.
items.
3. Enclose a note that describes the reason(s) you are
Software Technical Help returning the item(s).
1. Please have the number of the current version of 4. Insure your package for return shipment. Shipping
your software ready when you call. The version costs and any losses during shipment are your
number for software operating under Windows® is responsibility. 7COD packages cannot be
displayed by selecting “About” under the Help accepted and will be returned unopened.
menu bar item.
2. If you have a problem, explain the exact nature of
your problem. For example, what are the error
messages? (If possible, make a printout of the error
message.) When do they occur? Know what you
were doing when the problem occurred. For
example, what mode were you in? What steps did
you go through? Try to determine before you call
whether the problem is repeatable.
3. Please be at your computer when you call. We can
serve you better when we can work through the
problem together.

Software Technical Support


Emerson Process Management provides technical sup-
port through the following for those under support
agreement:
• Telephone assistance and communication via the
Internet.
• Mass updates that are released during that time.
• Interim updates upon request. Please contact
Emerson Process Management Product Support for
more information.

v
vi
Contents
How To Use This Manual · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 1-1
Emphasis Paragraphs · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 1-5
Analyzer Serialization· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 1-5
UltraMgr Software and Prerequisites · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 1-6
Standard Equipment · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 1-7
Fixtures Case Layout (bottom section) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 1-7
Fixtures Case Layout (top section) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 1-8

Chapter 2 • Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures


Models 821500 and 822500 RF Laser Systems Only · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-4
General Description · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-5
Sensor Head Description· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-5
General Maintenance · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-10
Care and Handling· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-10
Calibration· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-10
Battery Charging · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-11
Battery Usage - Laser Heads · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-16
Precautions · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-17
Introduction to Laser Alignment Fixtures Setup · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-18
Attaching the Fixtures · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-19
Attaching the B821007 Carbon Steel Mounting Base · · · · · · · · · · · 2-19
Attaching Chain to the Chain Pickup · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-20
Allowing Maximum Tightening Range · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-21
Positioning a Mounting Base · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-22
Positioning the Other Mounting Base · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-23
Attaching Excess Chain · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-24
Using the Chain Clip· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-26
Installing a Post · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-27
Mounting a Sensor Head · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-28
Models 821500 and 822500 RF Laser Systems Only · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-30
Mounting the Other Sensor Head · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-31
Communication Between the Fixtures and Analyzer · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-32
Connecting the 8000RF Interface · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-34

vii
Turn the Laser Beams On· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-40
Center the Laser Beams · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-41
Rough Alignment of the Laser Beams · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-42
Introduction to Special Applications · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-46
Using Additional Mounting Blocks · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-47
Adding a 2-inch (51 mm) Block· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-48
Mounting One Bracket on a Coupling · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-50
Mounting on Shafts (or Couplings) > 8-inch
(203 mm) Diameter · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-51
Using Alternative Mounting Brackets · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-52

Chapter 3 • Horizontal Alignment


Help · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-1
Basic Alignment Steps · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-1
Advanced and Basic Laser Align Applications · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-2
Advanced Laser Align · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-2
Basic Laser Align · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-2
Main Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-3
Three Step Alignment · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-5
Main Screen Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-6
Alt Main Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-7
Alt Main Screen Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-8
Job Reset· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-11
Basic Mode · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-12
Basic Mode Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-13
Job Reset· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-16
Machine Configuration Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-18
Laser Align (Alignment) Method Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-20
Tolerance Type · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-22
Tolerance Type Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-22
Laser Configuration Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-24
Laser Address Selection · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-26
Check Lasers· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-30
Laser Head Status Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-32
Job Manager · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-34

viii
Job Manager Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-35
Edit Job Setup · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-38
Edit Job Setup Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-39
Job Flow · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-42
Job Flow Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-43
Enter Dimensions · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-45
Entering Fractions · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-51
Quick Spec · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-53
Entering Thermal Growth Information · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-56
Growth at Feet· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-57
Growth at Profile· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-59
Gap/Offset · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-64
Face/Rim · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-68
Reverse Dial · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-72
Sweep Laser Heads · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-75
Foot Pre-Check · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-76
Foot Pre-Check Function Keys (after the Foot Pre-Check
has been started) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-82
Acquiring Alignment Data · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-82
Auto Sweep · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-85
Manual Sweep· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-94
Accept Readings key· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-97
Auto 4 Point · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-100
Manual 4 Point · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-105
Dual Pass· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-111
Dual Pass Cable (8215C2-PM) - Models 821500
and 822500 Only · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-119
Review Results · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-121
Review Results (Measurements) Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-124
Sweep Mode Curve Data · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-126
Data Quality · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-127
Move Machine · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-129
Vertical Move · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-130
Vertical Move Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-132
Horizontal Move · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-135
Horizontal Move Function Keys· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-137
Dual Move· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-140
Extra Foot Calculation · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-143
Predict Mode · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-145
Prediction Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-149
Live Move · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-149

ix
Data Detail (Tolerance Plots) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-162
Data Detail (Tolerance Plot) Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-166
Display Sine Fit · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-168
Display Sine Fit Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-172
View Data · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-174
C-face Alignment · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-175
Notes· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-180
Notes Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-180
Transferring Alignment Job Data and Tolerances · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-184
Tolerances· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-193
UltraMgr/2130 Laser Align Overview · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-194
Case Studies · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-195
UltraMgr · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-199
UltraMgr Software and Firmware Prerequisites· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-200
Tolerances· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-201

Chapter 4 • Vertical Alignment


Help · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-3
Basic Vertical Alignment Steps · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-3
Three Step Alignment· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-5
Vertical Main Screen Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-6
Vertical Alt Main Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-7
Vertical Alt Main Screen Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-8
Job Reset· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-10
Vertical Machine Configuration· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-11
Vertical Machine Configuration Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-12
Laser Angle Advance · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-13
Laser Angle Advance Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-14
Vertical Laser Configuration · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-15
Vertical Laser Configuration Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-16
Vertical Enter Dimensions · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-17
Define Flange · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-21
Define Flange Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-23
Custom Pattern · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-25
Custom Pattern Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-27
Vertical Sweep Laser Heads· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-29
Vertical Move Machine · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-38
Angular Move· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-39
Angular Move Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-40

x
Offset Move · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-41
Offset Move Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-44
Vertical Data Detail (Tolerance Plots) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-45

Chapter 5 • Straightness Measurements


Straightness Main Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-3
Three Step Straightness Measurements · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-4
Straightness Main Screen Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-5
Straightness Alt Main Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-6
Straightness Alt Main Screen Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-6
Straightness Laser Configuration · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-9
Straightness Laser Configuration Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-10
Straightness Enter Dimensions · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-11
Straightness Move Laser Heads · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-15
Straightness Surface Profile · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-18

Chapter A • Application Information


Alignment Application Notes · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · A-3
Pre-job Preparation and Setup· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · A-5
Changes That Occur During Operation· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · A-6
Alignment Pitfalls · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · A-8

Appendix B • Foot Pre-Check Types


Foot Pre-Check Measurement Methods – Soft Foot and
Frame Distortion Index (FDI) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · B-1

Appendix C • Technical Specifications


Mounting Posts (part number D23465) for Alignment Brackets · · · · · · · C-3

Appendix D • Accessories and Optional Products


Optional Items for Laser System· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · D-1
Other Accessories · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · D-1
Recommended Spare Parts* · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · D-2
Analyzer Travel/Carrying Cases · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · D-2

xi
Batteries/Analyzer Chargers· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·D-2
Alignment Fixtures · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·D-2
Customer Support · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·D-3
Reliability Services· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·D-4

Glossary

Index

xii
Chapter 1

Read This First

How To Use This Manual


This manual is arranged in the following manner:
• Chapter 1 — read this chapter before attempting to use the Model 2130
Laser Alignment program or before proceeding to subsequent chapters.
• Chapter 2 — lists and describes the various components that make up the
laser alignment system.
• Chapter 3 — provides general application overview information about pro-
cedures used in horizontal shaft alignment.
• Chapter 4 — provides general application overview information about pro-
cedures used in vertical shaft alignment.
• Chapter 5 — describes how to perform straightness measurements.
• Appendix A — provides general application overview information about pro-
cedures used in shaft alignment.

Note
This manual covers information specific to the 2130 RBMConsultant
Pro Advanced Laser Alignment program.

It is assumed that the user is familiar with the general hardware and
operation of the Model 2130 analyzer. If any questions or concerns
arise in using the analyzer, refer to the 2130 RBMConsultant Pro,
Dual-Channel Machinery Analyzer manual (part number 97017).

• Appendix B — provides descriptions of Foot Pre-Check types and their


advantages and disadvantages.
• Appendix C — details the technical specifications for the Model 8215/8225
laser alignment fixtures.
• Appendix D — describes the various accessories and optional products that
are available for use with the Laser Align application.

1-1
Note
In this manual, “8215” and “8225” (sometimes quoted as “8215/
8225”) refer to both the RF versions (Models 821500 and 822500)
and the direct-connect only versions (Models 821501 and 822501 )
laser systems except where information specific to one type of laser
system is discussed.

1-2
Introduction
The UltraSpec Pro 8215/8225 Laser Alignment Fixtures are the latest in a com-
plete line of alignment equipment provided by Emerson Process Management.
The 8215/8225 system is used in conjunction with the Model 2130 Laser Align pro-
gram. Although the Model 2130 analyzer can be purchased separately, it must be
used to process the data from the fixtures. The Model 8215/8225 system attaches
sensor heads to shafts which are typically coupled. Laser beams are emitted from
each sensor head and targeted on the opposite sensor head. Each shaft position is
measured in relation to the other shaft by rotating the two shafts. Shaft misalign-
ment is calculated from the position of each laser beam on its respective target, at a
range of angular positions of the laser heads.
The position of each laser beam on its target transmits from each sensor head to
the Model 2130 analyzer through radio frequency (RF) or direct cable communi-
cation, depending on the model. The Model 2130 analyzer processes the data and
calculates the required machine moves necessary to bring the machine compo-
nents into alignment.
With most alignment systems available today, the sag of the alignment fixtures must
be considered to accurately calculate machine moves. With the use of laser beams,
there is no fixture sag to consider! The RF communication between the sensor
heads and the Model 2130 analyzer simplifies data acquisition and reduces oper-
ator error. The direct cable connect provides an alternate method to transfer data
when the RF link is not practical.
Since each head has a self-contained inclinometer and additional memory, the
data can be acquired through a variety of methods. Choices range from the tradi-
tional top, bottom, left, and right locations (minimum of three) - where the fixtures
interact directly with the analyzer to the patented partial sweep method (the sensor
heads memorize the data and later dump it to the analyzer).
When the 8215/8225 fixtures and the 2130 Laser Align program are used with the
UltraMgr PC software program, a complete alignment program can be managed
from a centralized location. UltraMgr provides job tracking, control of alignment
tolerances, alignment history and much more.

How To Use This Manual 1-3


Some advantages of the UltraSpec Pro 8215/8225 Laser Alignment Fixtures are:
• Easy setup
• No fixture sag
• Visible laser to assist with rough alignments
• Large diameter mounting range
• Large span range between sensor heads
• Large vertical expansion to clear larger couplings
• Large misalignment measurement range
• Partial revolutions (down to 45°)
• Dual Pass method for uncoupled alignments
• Real time machine move monitoring, vertical and horizontal
• Soft foot locator
• Radio frequency communication
• Direct cable connect, if needed
• Automatic data acquisition
• Dual beam technology
• Internal angle sensors
• Internal memory
• 45-minute charge cycle for sensor heads
• Simultaneously charging, sensor heads and analyzer
• Best ambient light protection
• Vertical machine alignment
• Straightness measurement

1-4
Emphasis Paragraphs
Two different types of paragraphs are used throughout this manual to call attention
to the adjacent text:

Note
The note paragraph indicates special comments or instructions.

Caution!
The caution paragraph alerts you to actions that may have a major impact,
such as lost data or damage to the analyzer or its accessories.

Warning!
The warning paragraph warns you of actions that could cause serious
personal injury or death.

Analyzer Serialization
The loaded firmware has been serialized and is matched to the analyzer serial
number. If the firmware and analyzer serial numbers do not match, contact
Product Support.

How To Use This Manual 1-5


UltraMgr Software and Prerequisites

Note
Your AMS™ Suite: Machinery Health™ Manager software and
Model 2130 RBMCONSULTANT PRO must have compatible software.

Requirements
Model 2130 RBMCONSULTANT PRO firmware version v.6.3.8.0 or later.
The following, 4.90 or later, AMS™ Suite: Machinery Health™ Manager files -
dated 08/08/2005 or later:
• RBMcom.exe
• RBMcomSr.exe
• XFrAlg.dll
• UltraAlg.exe
UltraMgr requires some planning and setup before jobs can be down-loaded into
this alignment program. Refer to the appropriate UltraMgr user’s manual for more
information on communicating with the PC.

1-6
Standard Equipment
When checking the kit to ensure that everything ordered was shipped, compare
the contents of the package to your shipping invoice. For additional assistance,
refer to the following fixtures case layouts. If a discrepancy is found, call Emerson
Customer Support at (865) 671-4274.

Fixtures Case Layout (bottom section)

Note
Some parts shown in these illustrations may be optional in different
packages.

Standard Equipment 1-7


Fixtures Case Layout (top section)

1-8
Chapter 2

Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures

Special Instructions About the 8215/8225 Laser Fixtures

Warning!
Prior to mounting the laser alignment fixtures on machine shafts, all
switches operating the machines should be “locked out” (follow
lockout procedures for your facility). On completion of the align-
ment, inspect the work area to ensure that all equipment is clear of
rotating shafts and couplings, prior to removal of the lockout protec-
tion.

Warning!
The 8215/8225 Laser Alignment Fixtures use a Class II (CDRH) laser
or Class 2 (IEC) laser. This laser complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and
1040.11 safety requirements with a power output < 1.0 mW (average)
and a pulse repetition of 600 pulses/sec. The pulse duration is <110
microseconds. However, do not expose the human eye directly to the
laser beam! Warnings are located on each sensor head.

Warning!
Using the controls or adjustments in ways other than specified in this
documentation may result in hazardous laser radiation exposure.
Making the hardware, firmware, or software perform in ways other
than specified in this documentation may result in hazardous laser
radiation exposure.

2-1
Laser heads, front view

Laser heads, rear view

2-2 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures


Note
Only the Models 821501 and 822501 direct-connect only laser sys-
tems have CE approval.

Laser radiation caution

2-3
Models 821500 and 822500 RF Laser Systems Only

Note
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any inter-
ference, including interference that may cause undesired operation
of this device.

Note
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide a reasonable protection against
harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commer-
cial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at his own expense.

Caution!
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Emerson could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.

Caution!
This device has been designed to operate solely with the antenna type provided,
Emerson part number 88200. An antenna having a higher gain is strictly pro-
hibited per regulations of Industry Canada.

2-4 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures


General Description

Sensor Head Description


This section describes both the old and current versions of the 8215/8225 laser
heads. The older version of heads can be identified by their gray front panels and
black grid lines. The current version of heads have different color front panels.
Head A has a gray front panel with white grid lines and blue on/off buttons, while
head B has a blue front panel with white grid lines and gray on/off buttons.

Note
Throughout the manual, photos may contain images of either the
older or current versions of laser heads.

Vertical Laser Head


Laser Model # Power
RF Antenna
Adjustment Horizontal Button
Post
Laser
Grip
Adjustment
RF Antenna
Housing

Direct
Connect
Port
Activity
Sensor LED
Head ID
Targets Laser Charging
(PSD’s) Source Port

General Description 2-5


The sensor head with the laser source on top is the Master head (known as head
“A”). The other head is the Slave (known as head “B”). The model number is listed
on the back of each head. They can be identified by the letter A or B on the front.
There are no differences between the older and current versions of the 8215/8225
laser heads with the exception of the front panels and batteries. The older version
is powered by nickel cadmium (NiCad) batteries, while the current version is pow-
ered by Nickel Metal Hydride (NiMH) batteries.
The difference between the Model 8215 sensor heads and the 8225 sensor heads
are the target (Position Sensing Detector or PSD) size, laser distance, and the front
overlay. The 8215 sensor head has a 10mm x 10mm PSD and a laser which allows
alignments over a sensor spacing up to 30 feet, or 9 meters. The 8225 sensor head
has a 20mm x 20mm PSD and a laser which allows alignments over a sensor spacing
up to 100 feet (30.5 meters).
Although the direct-connect only laser system (Model 821501 and 822501) is not
illustrated in this manual, the only difference between it and the RF laser system
(Models 821500 and 822500) is that the RF system transmits information using
either the RF or direct-connect communication. The direct-connect only laser
system uses only the direct-connect communication. For this reason, the direct-con-
nect only laser systems do not have an RF antenna or antenna housing.

2-6 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures


The Activity LED on the front panel can be red, yellow, or green. An explanation
of their meaning is shown in the following table.

Table 1:
LED Status Meaning Required Action
Green Yellow Red
Normal Operation - When the No Action Required
Laser Head systems are all
functioning properly and the
laser beam from the companion
Laser Head is striking the PSD in
X the linear region. This is the
desired state. The Laser Head is
in the acceptable condition to
perform an alignment.

Sensor head in standby (sleep) Use analyzer to wake up when


mode - When the Laser Head needed by initiating
sees no activity for five minutes, communication with the laser
they automatically enter Sleep heads.
Mode to conserve battery
power. The color will be the
X (flashing) one that was active, solid or
flashing, before this state was
entered. When this sleep mode
is entered, the LED will be
flashed off for 1.5 sec. and on
for 0.5 sec.
Minor Error* Refer to “(6) Laser Head Status
Screen” on page 3-16 for more
X information on the error and the
required action.

General Description 2-7


Table 1:
LED Status Meaning Required Action
Green Yellow Red
Low battery 1st warning (sensor Recharge sensor heads.
head) - The Laser Head has the
ability to monitor its own
battery power. The battery
power is checked periodically
to determine if it is below the
X (flashing) minimum acceptable power.
When the battery power
reaches 4.8 volts, the LED will
be flashed off for 0.5 sec. and
then flashed on for 0.5 sec. Data
is accepted when the battery is
this state.

Major Error* Refer to “(6) Laser Head Status


X Screen” on page 3-16 for more
information on the error and the
required action.

Low battery 2nd/final warning Recharge sensor heads.


(sensor head) - The Laser Head
has the ability to monitor its
own battery power. The battery
power is checked periodically
to determine if it is below the
X (flashing) minimum acceptable power.
When the battery power
reaches 4.2 volts, the LED will
be flashed off for 0.5 sec. and
then flashed on for 0.5 sec. Data
is not accepted when the battery
is this state.

* If a minor error is present, the data being acquired may be marginal. The data
quality will depend on the error. If a major error is present, then some kind of hard-
ware or system problem exists. Therefore, the data being acquired is rejected.

2-8 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures


LED Functionality Difference Due to Dual Pass mode
The functionality of the LED differs slightly from the states described in the above
table when the Dual Pass mode of operation is selected. The difference lies in the
LED state when the companion Laser Heads laser beam is on the PSD. In Dual Pass
mode, when the laser beam is on or off of the PSD the LED will be a solid yellow,
even when the beam is in the linear portion of the PSD. The beam will then flash
to green whenever a valid data point is acquired. This deviation is necessary to allow
for the indication to the user that the Laser Heads are acquiring data as they are
rotated past each other.

Note
To determine the actual error, select the Check Lasers option on the
Alt screen. This will activate the Laser Heads Status screen. If an error
condition actually exists, its type will be shown in a popup window
within 60 seconds. Refer to the Check Lasers section for more infor-
mation.

General Description 2-9


General Maintenance

Care and Handling


To ensure satisfactory service from this system, follow these procedures:
• Keep the mounting base and chain mounting posts lightly oiled to prevent
them from corroding.
• To maintain repeatability and accuracy, avoid dropping fixture items. Refer
to the Customer Assistance section for repair, update, and calibration.
• Do not subject system items to large temperature swings.
• Do not engrave on the sensor heads.
• Keep all lens free of grease, dirt, oil, and other smudges.
• Clean the laser and target lens with a soft, lint-free cloth and standard lens
cleaning solution (a field size cleaner container is available from Emerson).
Never use an organic solvent such as a thinner or benzine.
• Store sensor heads in protective hard-shell carrying case when not in use.

Calibration
The Model 8215/8225 calibration should be checked every two years. Return the
sensor heads to Emerson for a calibration check. All calibrations are NIST trace-
able.

Caution!
Do not remove the CSI Quality label on the back of the sensor head. This will
void your warranty.

2-10 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures


Battery Charging
Batteries must be charged with the Model 8211charger. The Model 8211 charger
is a “smart, drop-in” charger that can provide a fast- or trickle-charge for the laser
heads and analyzer.
This section describes both the old and current version of the 8211 charger. The
older version of the 8211 charger can be identified by its solid gray front panel. The
current version of the 8211 charger also uses a gray motif on the front panels, but
the area around the Fast and Discharge buttons is blue.

Model 8211 Smart Charger


The Model 8211 charger provides all battery charging needs and comes with the
system. It is a “smart, drop in” charger for the laser heads; it will also charge the ana-
lyzer when plugged into a cable. The following picture shows both of the laser
heads and the analyzer being charged.

Charging the Sensor Heads and Analyzer with Model 8211 Charger.

General Maintenance 2-11


The current version of the 8211 charger will charge both the former and current
versions of the 8215/8225 laser heads but at a slower charge rate than the older ver-
sion of the 8211 charger. The former version of the 8211 charger charges the
former version of the 8215/8225 laser heads, but it will only trickle charge the cur-
rent version of the 8215/8225 laser heads. Although no damage will occur if the
Fast Charge cycle is initiated, this cycle will not work for the current version of the
laser heads.
To set up the 8211 charger, complete these steps:
1. . . plug the power cord into the power supply,
2. . . plug the power cord into an AC receptacle,
3. . . plug the power supply into the 8211 charger in the top end cap.
At that time, the beeper will sound indicating that power has been applied to the
battery charger. As a test, all LEDs will illuminate for 1.5 seconds.
4. . . Plug the analyzer charging cable into the bottom end cap.
The sensor heads and analyzer can now be charged either individually or, all at the
same time.

Charging the Sensor Heads with the Model 8211 Charger


Drop them over the posts so that the head faces outward as shown in the previous
illustration. Heads can be charged individually or together.

Indicator Light Charging Status

Pending Waiting for safe voltage and


temperature

Discharge (steady) Batteries discharging

Discharge (flashing) Discharge requested, waiting


for safe voltage or temperature

Fast (steady) Batteries in fast charge

Fast (flashing) Fast charge requested, waiting


for safe voltage or temperature

Trickle Batteries in trickle charge,


topping-off, or charge complete

2-12 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures


Note
The discharge cycle is intended for older versions of the laser heads,
powered by Nickel Cadmium (NiCad) batteries. This function is not
required for the current version of the laser heads, powered by Nickel
Metal Hydride (NiMH) batteries. However, use of this function on
laser heads with NiMH batteries will not result in any damage to the
heads or charger.

For maximum safety, the battery charger has a Pending status LED, which lights
momentarily when the head is first placed on the charger. If a battery is very low, or
is out of a specific temperature range, it cannot be safely charged. When this con-
dition occurs the Pending indicator remains illuminated. While Pending, the
charger is actually charging the batteries at a very low rate in an attempt to charge
the low battery to an acceptable voltage range. Once the battery temperature and
voltage are suitable for charging, the charger automatically begins trickle charging
and the Trickle indicator light turns on.
To fast charge or discharge the battery the Fast button or Discharge button must
be pressed. If the Fast button or Discharge button is pressed while the battery
voltage is too low or temperature is not suitable for Fast or Discharge operation, the
indicator light will flash on and off. This response acknowledges the request but
indicates that the charger cannot fulfill the request at that time. Once voltage and
temperature conditions are suitable, the requested Fast or Discharge operation will
begin and the indicator light will change to a steady light.

Caution!
Note that if the battery is fully charged, a user is able to initiate fast charge by
pressing the Fast button. After about 2 minutes, the charger will stop fast charge
in this case. However, to avoid overcharging batteries, you should not press the
Fast button with an already fully charged battery.

General Maintenance 2-13


After the Fast charging cycle has completed, the charger’s beeper sounds and the
charger automatically begins trickle charging. When this condition begins, the
Trickle indicator light turns on indicating that the battery is almost completely
charged, or is completely charged. For the laser head batteries, the two conditions
occur within a few minutes of each other. Charge time from a fully discharged set
of batteries to approximately a 90% voltage charge is 45 minutes (current version
of the 8211 charger) and 15 minutes for the former version of the 8211 Charger.
If the Discharge cycle has been initiated, on completion the charger automatically
begins fast charging and the Fast indicator light turns on. If charging a former ver-
sion of the laser heads that contain NiCad batteries - to avoid the battery memory
concern use the Discharge mode when you have more than 20 minutes to charge
the sensor head batteries. The typical charge cycle is as follows:

Action Time

Press DISCHARGE button Start

DISCHARGE complete, FAST starts 7 minutes

FAST complete, TRICKLE starts – charging complete 22 minutes

NOTE: The heads can be left on TRICKLE indefinitely (until the next time they are
needed).

Note
After power has been applied to the charger and the sensor head(s)
placed in it, if none of the LED's for that sensor head are lit then the
contact between the sensor head and charger may not be sufficient
to charge the batteries. No LED's lit indicates a “no battery present”
state. If this takes place, remove the sensor head from the charger and
try reseating it back into the charger.

2-14 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures


Note
After a charging cycle begins, if that charging cycle is interrupted (e.g.
disconnecting the power to the charger or removing the sensor head
from the charger) the charging process described above initiates
from the beginning. Therefore, if the charger cycle is interrupted
while the Fast charge mode is in progress, then the charger automat-
ically begins trickle charging after Pending(see below).

The “Pending LED” lights momentarily and switches into Fast charge. Charge time
for a fully discharged set of batteries is 45 minutes (for the current version of the
8211 charger) and 15 minutes for the former version of the 8211 charger. The
beeper will sound when both heads are fully charged and the charger switches to
trickle.

Charging the Analyzer with the Model 8211 Charger


Charging functions for the 8117, 2120 and 2130 analyzers are identical for both the
former and current versions of the 8211 charger.
Plug the charging cable (A821102) from the bottom end cap on the 8211 charger
into the charger port on the top end cap of the analyzer. The battery pack will
recharge in three hours. After the battery pack has been fully charged, the battery
charger automatically switches to a trickle charge.

General Maintenance 2-15


Battery Usage - Laser Heads
Power is supplied to each sensor head via a rechargeable battery pack. A fully
charged battery pack provides five to six hours of continuous service while transmit-
ting data. Longer operation is possible since typical alignments do not require con-
tinuous communication with the analyzer. The battery is designed to have a long
life and is not intended to be replaced by the user. Replacement should be per-
formed only at Emerson. Emerson recommends that the batteries be replaced
after 500 charges.
To conserve battery life, the 8215/8225 has a sleep mode and a shutdown mode.
The sleep mode is activated after 5 minutes of no communication with the analyzer.
In the sleep mode, the laser beam and RF communication are shutdown until com-
munication is reestablished. All data in memory is saved. In the auto-shutdown
mode, the sensor heads are completely shutdown. The Power Button starts the
sensor heads again. All data in memory is lost, therefore another sweep should be
taken.
The sleep and auto-shutdown modes can be disabled. To disable the sleep mode
on each laser head, with the laser heads off, press and hold the Power Buttons. This
will cause the laser heads and their corresponding LED’s to power on for approxi-
mately two seconds. Then laser heads and their corresponding LED’s will power off
for approximately three seconds. After the laser heads and their corresponding
LED’s power back on again, the shutdown mode will be disabled. To re-enable the
sleep mode, just power the heads off.

Note
Please note that this disables the battery conservation (for the sensor
heads) therefore, if the heads are left on, the batteries will run down.

2-16 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures


Precautions
Please follow these precautions carefully. Any product damage due to these condi-
tions may void the warranty.
• Use only Emerson-supplied battery chargers that have been approved for
use with the analyzer and Model 8215/8225 laser heads. The use of any
other charger will most likely damage the equipment.
• Do not use Emerson battery chargers with anything other than the product
for which they are designed. Do not use the 8211 charger to charge any-
thing else!
• Do not use any batteries other than those included and/or specified for the
analyzer and 8215/8225 laser heads.
• Do not connect a printer directly to the RS232 port located on the top panel
of the analyzer.
• Do not connect any adapters or accessories to the RS232 port located on the
top panel of the analyzer while the analyzer is turned on.
• Do not start the machines being aligned with the laser alignment system
equipment attached. Be sure to remove the laser system before starting the
machinery.

Precautions 2-17
Introduction to Laser Alignment Fixtures Setup
This section takes you through a step-by-step setup of the 8215/8225 Laser Align-
ment Fixtures. Before before beginning the actual machine alignment, be sure all
pre-alignment checks have been completed.

Warning!
Prior to mounting the laser alignment fixtures on machine shafts, all
switches operating the machines should be locked out. Follow safety
precautions for your facility. Normally, only personnel performing
the alignment should be able to unlock any startup switch. After an
alignment has been completed, the work area should be inspected to
ensure that all equipment is clear of rotating shafts/couplings prior
to removal of the lockout protection.

Warning!
The 8215/8225 Laser Alignment Fixtures use a Class II (CDRH) laser
or Class 2 (IEC) laser. This laser complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and
1040.11 safety requirements with a power output < 1.0 mW (average)
and a pulse repetition of 600 pulses/sec. The pulse duration is <110
microseconds. However, do not expose the human eye directly to the
laser beam! Warnings are located on each sensor head.

Water vapor or dust can interfere with a target “seeing” its laser. The air between the
sensor heads should be visually clear. Ensure that the air between the sensor heads
is not being heated from steam leaks, uninsulated piping, etc. Heated air rising
within the span between the sensor heads can refract the laser beams and cause
errors in the alignment readings.
Operate the laser fixtures at ambient temperatures. If the fixtures have been stored
at a different temperature than ambient, allow the laser fixtures to acclimate to
ambient. Ensure that any heat source that may be present is not creating a large
temperature difference between the laser fixtures and the ambient temperature.
Sunlight itself will not cause a laser reading problem.

2-18 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures


Attaching the Fixtures
This section shows how to attach and secure the mounting base, chains, align the
two mounting bases by leveling, install the sensor heads, turn on the sensor heads,
and center the lasers on their targets.

Attaching the B821007 Carbon Steel Mounting Base


The B821007 3/4 inch (19mm) wide carbon steel mounting bracket is suitable for
the majority of alignment jobs where the laser fixtures can be rigidly mounted to a
shaft that can be rotated freely.
Select the chain tightener of choice. The right photograph shows a knurled nut
which can be tightened by hand. The hex nut mechanism provides a more stable,
versatile mounting while the knurled nut is more convenient. Use each nut as
shown.
2

Standard Nut Knurled Knob

These photographs illustrate how the chain assembly should be slipped into the
mounting base. Hold the chain out away from the base and slip the cylinder into its
cradle. To ensure maximum tightening range, each nut should be flush with the
end of the tightening bolt.

Attaching the Fixtures 2-19


Attaching Chain to the Chain Pickup

This photograph illustrates how the chain attaches and actually clamps the shaft.
The base is placed on the shaft (or coupling) and a link of the chain is slipped into
the chain pickup to secure the base to the shaft. After slipping a chain link into the
chain pickup, tighten the bolt at the end of the chain.

2-20 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures


Allowing Maximum Tightening Range

To allow for maximum tightening range, ensure that the chain nut is flush with the
end of the chain bolt (as shown by arrow). Notice that the chain bolts are on oppo-
site sides. As shown in later sections, each mounting base can be installed on either
end and the chain bolts placed on either side of the shaft.

Attaching the Fixtures 2-21


Positioning a Mounting Base

Tighten one of the mounting bases and rotate it (along with the shaft) until it is
somewhat level at the top of the rotation. To tighten the mounting base, use a 9/16 inch
wrench or your hand, depending on which chain tightener is being used.

Caution!
Do not overtighten the chain — the maximum tightening torque is 10 ft.-lbs.

2-22 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures


Positioning the Other Mounting Base

With the previous mounting base still in its level position, if necessary, loosen and
rotate the other mounting base until it is somewhat level with it. Tighten this base
and recheck the other base to ensure that both are now level in relation to one
another.
Although this part of the procedure is not absolutely critical, placing the mounting
bases relatively level with each other allows the laser beam adjustment to be more
or less centered. This ensures that the laser beams can line up with their targets
easily.
Also, there may be times when the top position is not accessible. The objective of
this step is to mount the sensor heads in the same rotational position. This provides
the maximum rotational range for the sensor during data acquisition.

Attaching the Fixtures 2-23


Attaching Excess Chain
One of the problems with using chains as a mounting bracket is that the excess
chain flops and can cause errors. CSI’s Laser Alignment Fixtures provide solutions
for this problem.
Two slots are provided (one on either side) to take up the slack. As shown in the
following photographs, you can use either or both of the slots as needed. The order
of use is not important. In fact, the L-slot cannot be used when mounting to shafts
(or couplings) greater than 3 inches (76 mm) in diameter. When fastening the
chain into the T-shaped slot, the rubber block will hold the chain in place.
The photograph below illustrates using the T-shaped slot; see the following page for
an example using the L-shaped slot.

Using the T-shaped Slot

2-24 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures


Using the L-shaped Slot

Caution!
Do not attach excess chain prior to tightening the mounting base chain bolts.
Doing so may cause damage to the L and T-shaped slots.

Attaching the Fixtures 2-25


Using the Chain Clip

You will almost always have a little extra chain left over. In that case, use the chain
clip (part number D22745) to attach it to the previous chain loop. Emerson recom-
mends that you use this clip to help prevent the chain from sliding out of the
L-slot as the shafts are rotated.

2-26 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures


Installing a Post

Screw a mounting post (part number D23465) into each of the outer holes in the
mounting base. Tighten each post with the supplied tightener (Phillips screw-
driver) or with a 1/8 inch Allen wrench (not supplied with kit).

Attaching the Fixtures 2-27


Mounting a Sensor Head

Note
The gray sensor head with the laser source on top is designated head
“A”. The “B” designation is attached to the blue sensor head with the
laser source on the bottom. In addition to their color difference,
head A and B are identified with letters on the front panel.

Place a sensor head on the two posts. It does not matter on which side Head A or
Head B is mounted — the heads will be configured in the analyzer. Adjust to desired
position and tighten each post clamp finger tight. The mounting posts allow up to
1.5 inches (38 mm) of vertical adjustment. If more vertical adjustment is needed,
use the vertical extension blocks. See “Introduction to Special Applications” on
page 2-46 through “Adding a 2-inch (51 mm) Block” on page 2-48 for additional
information.

2-28 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures


Note
Longer mounting posts are not available. However, if you wish to
make your own, refer to the mechanical drawing of a mounting post
in the section entitled “Mounting Post (part number D23465) For
Alignment Brackets” in Appendix B.

Attaching the Fixtures 2-29


Models 821500 and 822500 RF Laser Systems Only
Depending on the clearance around which the laser head will be rotated, the posi-
tion of the RF antenna may have to be adjusted. When the antenna is in its most
upright position it extends up above the top of the laser head. Holding the antenna
housing (not the antenna itself), rotate or twist the antenna down (or up
depending on its starting position) to its desired position. The antenna’s rotational
arc is 30 degrees. When the antenna is in the down position it does not extend
above the top of the laser head.
3

2-30 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures


Mounting the Other Sensor Head

Install the opposite sensor head in the same manner (Head A or Head B,
depending on which sensor head was mounted on the other side).

Models 821500 and 822500 RF Laser Systems Only 2-31


Communication Between the Fixtures and Analyzer
The analyzer conducts communication with the fixtures via a short-range, low-
power radio frequency (RF) carrier (916.5 MHz) or by cable.
Radio Frequency (Models 821500 and 822500 only) - With RF, communication
occurs in much the same manner as with other short-range wireless systems (for
example, cordless phones) — a direct line-of-sight communication is not required.
A typical operating range of up to 50 feet (15 meters) can be achieved using RF
communication, but this range is greatly influenced by building construction mate-
rials and contents, other radio systems operating in the vicinity at or near the same
operating frequency, and noise generated by nearby equipment. It is not unusual
to achieve four times the typical operating range in electrically quiet environment
or to achieve less than the typical operating range in an electrically noisy environ-
ment.

Note
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide a reasonable protection against
harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commer-
cial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at his own expense.

Caution!
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Emerson could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.

There may be times when an RF communication between each sensor head and
the analyzer is not convenient. Moving or keeping the analyzer closer to the laser
heads can minimize this inconvenience.

2-32 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures


The sensor heads have memory for saving alignment readings. If communication
with the analyzer is broken during rotation (while using the Auto Sweep mode),
these readings are stored in memory until they can be transmitted. When the
sensor head is turned off, the memory data is erased.
If the analyzer is out of range of one or both sensor heads or if some sort of RF inter-
ference is occurring, it will repeatedly attempt to communicate with the sensor
heads. A message will be displayed on the analyzer until the communication link is
established.
When communication using RF becomes difficult, Emerson recommends that you
use the Direct Connect link as described in “Direct Connect (All Models)” on page
2-36.

Models 821500 and 822500 RF Laser Systems Only 2-33


Connecting the 8000RF Interface

Attaching 8000RF to 25-pin Connector

Install the 8000RF Interface onto the serial port of the analyzer by completing the
following steps:
1. . . Ensure that the Model 2130 analyzer is turned off.
2. . . Connect the 25-pin connector of the 8000RF Interface to the RS-232 port on
the Model 2130 analyzer.
3. . . Turn the Model 2130 analyzer on.

2-34 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures


Caution!
Do not rotate or twist the antenna on the 8000RF Interface. Attempting to do so
will damage the unit.

The Attached 8000RF Interface.

Models 821500 and 822500 RF Laser Systems Only 2-35


Direct Connect (All Models)
Direct Connect is designed for those conditions where it is difficult to communi-
cate between the analyzer and the sensor heads using RF. Conditions such as
building construction materials and contents, other radio systems operating in the
vicinity at or near the same operation frequency, and noise generated by nearby
equipment all may make RF communication unsatisfactory.

Note
Both the A800001 and A821510 Direct Connect cables will work with
the 8215/8225 laser heads for all modes of operation where commu-
nication between the laser heads and analyzer are necessary, except
for the Dual Pass mode. Only the A821510 cable can be used for the
Dual Pass mode when using direct-connect communication.

2-36 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures


To use Direct Connect, complete these steps:
1. . . Make sure the analyzer is turned off.
2. . . Attach the 25-pin connector of the direct connect cable to the RS232 port on
top of the analyzer.
3. . . Connect the Lemo connectors of the direct connect cable to the mating
straight Lemo connector on the extension cables, if applicable.

Note
When connecting the Lemo connector to its mating connector, line
up the red dots located on each connector with each other before
completing the connections. To complete the connection, push the
connectors together. Do not twist.

4. . . Connect the Lemo connector on the opposite end of the cable to the Lemo
port under the nose of each 8215/8225.

Note
When connecting the Lemo connector to its mating connector, line
up the red dots located on each connector with each other before
completing the connections. To complete the connection, push the
connectors together. Do not twist.

5. . . Turn the analyzer on.


From this point on, Direct Connect is very easy to use. The analyzer determines that
it is connected and disables the RF communication (Models 821500 and 822500
only). Cables can be unplugged and reconnected at any time (and at any connec-
tion). You do not have to remember which cable is plugged to which head. Even if
you switch the orientation of the cables (when reconnecting), the analyzer can
adjust to the change and will still work correctly.

Models 821500 and 822500 RF Laser Systems Only 2-37


4

Caution!
When using any cable connector inside the sensor head connector, do not turn
or twist the connector. This will shear the cable pins off (inside the connector)
totally disabling the sensor head and cable. Pull the cable connector completely
out of the sensor head connector before turning the cable.

The direct connect cable is 5 feet (1.5 m) long with “pigtail” style cable. When
standing between the sensor heads, a 6 feet (1.8 m) span can be aligned,
depending on the diameter of the shaft. Extension cables, Model 800002 and
Model 800003, are available for longer spans, larger diameter shafts, or if you
cannot stand directly in the middle.

2-38 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures


The extension cables are eight feet (2.4 meters) long. With two extension cables
and the connection pigtail, the total length is 13 feet (4 meters). When standing
between the sensor heads, a 22 foot (6.7 meters) span can be aligned, depending
on the diameter of the shaft.

Note
With the 8215, a maximum distance of 30 feet (9 m) between the
laser heads can be achieved. With the 8225, a maximum distance of
100 feet (30.5 m) between laser heads can be achieved.

Models 821500 and 822500 RF Laser Systems Only 2-39


Turn the Laser Beams On

To turn the laser beams on, press the power button on each sensor head. See “Bat-
tery Usage - Laser Heads” on page 2-16 for power button options.

Warning!
Although the laser in the 8215/8225 system is low in intensity (< 1.0
mW), never direct the beam at a human eye. Use of controls, or
adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those speci-
fied by Emerson may result in hazardous laser radiation exposure. To
do so could result in serious personal injury. Always ensure that the
sensor heads are mounted securely before turning on the laser beam.

2-40 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures


Center the Laser Beams

Vertical Adjustment Horizontal Adjustment


Center both Lasers on their associated target by adjusting the thumb wheels on the
front of each sensor head.

Models 821500 and 822500 RF Laser Systems Only 2-41


Rough Alignment of the Laser Beams
Rough alignment may be required to keep the laser beam on the target as the fix-
tures are rotated. Either of these methods can be used:
• Visible Beam rough alignment — utilizes the visible laser beams without the
use of the analyzer
• Partial Sweep rough alignment — utilizes the partial sweep capabilities of the
analyzer

Visible Beam Rough Alignment


This adjustment must be performed in each of the movement planes (typically
horizontal and vertical, when required). A horizontal adjustment is illustrated in
the following figure; duplicate the actions for vertical adjustments.

2. Rotate laser
1. Center laser beams heads 180° 3. Estimate distance
in respective targets moved by laser beam

Laser beam
position after
heads have
been rotated

. . 180°

4. Move machine to position


beams approximately half distance
back toward center of target

Rough Horizontal Laser Beam Adjustments

2-42 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures


The gridlines on the front panel should assist you in determining the approximate
movement(s) needed to rough the machines in. Gridline spacing is 0.3 inches (7.5
mm). The following table shows recommended moves based upon the gross move-
ment of the laser beam on the sensor head. Gross movements are discussed in ver-
tical terms for simplicity.

Models 821500 and 822500 RF Laser Systems Only 2-43


Gross Movement
Recommended Machine Move
at Gearbox at Motor

Small Large, Angular & Offset – add shims under the inboard
down Gearbox feet or remove shims from the outboard
Gearbox feet.

Large, Small Angular & Offset – add shims under the inboard Motor
down feet or remove shims from the outboard Motor feet.

Large, up Large, Offset – add shims to all feet of the Gearbox or remove
down shims from all feet of the Motor.

Large, Large, up Offset – add shims to all feet of the Motor or remove
down shims from all feet of the Gearbox.

Large, up Large, up Angular – add shims under the outboard feet of both
machines or remove shims from the inboard feet of both
machines.

Large down Large down Angular – remove shims from the outboard feet of both
machines or add shims under the inboard feet of both
machines.

Note
There will, of course, be combinations of the movements shown in
the previous table. However, these recommendations should provide
some general guidelines.

Partial Sweep Rough Alignment


In this method, you must use the fixtures and set the analyzer to Manual Sweep or
Auto Sweep mode. Either method can provide an effective target area much larger
than the 20 mm x 20 mm surface area. If the fixtures can be rotated and both
beams remain on target greater than 90° (recommended) of the sweep, the analyzer
can produce an alignment solution from the data taken. Data gathered from the
portion of the sweep that the laser beams were off target is rejected. For more infor-
mation about sweep data collection modes, see Chapter 6.

2-44 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures


This procedure also works when using the Dual Pass mode.

Note
Roughing in the machine so that the laser beam is kept on the target
(PSD) as the laser fixtures are rotated can be quicker with a larger
PSD (e.g. with the 20x20mm PSD on the 8225 laser fixtures).

Models 821500 and 822500 RF Laser Systems Only 2-45


Introduction to Special Applications
This section covers using additional mounting blocks, mounting on large diame-
ters ( shafts > 8 inches (203 mm), and using alternative mounting brackets. Nor-
mally, additional blocks are used to achieve greater coupling clearance. In some
cases, you may find that one (or both) of the mounting blocks must be installed on
the coupling itself. For larger diameter shafts (or mounting on a coupling), addi-
tional lengths of chain may also be needed to mount the base.

2-46 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures


Using Additional Mounting Blocks
Additional 1-inch, 2-inch, and 4-inch (25 mm, 51 mm, and 102 mm) mounting
blocks are available for greater coupling clearances when using the B821007
carbon steel mounting bracket and the A800052 soft-mount (non-rotational)
mounting bracket.

Mounting a One-inch (25 mm) Block

This photograph shows a 1-inch (25 mm) block being mounted onto the
mounting block itself.

Note
Emerson recommends that you tighten all vertical mounting block
cap screws to 50 in-lbs (without lubrication).

Using Additional Mounting Blocks 2-47


Adding a 2-inch (51 mm) Block

This is a picture of a 2-inch (51 mm) block being attached on top of the 1-inch (25
mm) block (the blocks can be stacked in either order).

2-48 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures


7

This shows the complete 3-inch (76 mm) extension setup. The following table lists
which blocks are to be used for the various vertical extension ranges.

For Vertical Extension Use These Block(s)


Length (inches) (inches)

0 0

1 1

2 2

3 1, 2

Using Additional Mounting Blocks 2-49


Mounting One Bracket on a Coupling

If at all possible, Emerson recommends that you mount the brackets on the shafts.
However, this is not always possible. Occasionally, you may have to mount the
bracket on a coupling.
This view shows the B821007 carbon steel mounting brackets being mounted to
the shaft on one side and the coupling on the other. In order to do this, you may
have to use a vertical extension block(s). In the example shown above, a 1-inch (25
mm) extension block is being used on the right side; no block is used on the left
(coupling) side.

2-50 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures


Mounting on Shafts (or Couplings) > 8-inch (203 mm) Diameter
Although the mounting base itself can be used on shaft diameters up to 26 inches
(660 mm), additional section(s) of chain must be used for applications greater
than 8 inches (203 mm) in diameter. Emerson sells extension lengths in two-feet
chain increments for the B821007 carbon steel mounting bracket (part number
D22773) and the A800052 soft-mount (non-rotational) mounting bracket (part
number A832001). In addition to the chain itself, extension kits include a clevis pin
and a hair pin, which are used to connect the sections of chain together.
Refer to the following table to determine chains needed with various shaft diame-
ters.

For Shaft Diameters Inches


Use These Chain Lengths
(mm)

Less than 8 (203) Standard Chain Length

8 - 15 1/2 Standard Chain Length +


(203 – 394) 1 Optional Length

15 1/2 – 23 Standard Chain Length +


(394 – 584) 2 Optional Lengths

23 – 26 Standard Chain Length +


(584 – 660) 3 Optional Lengths

Using Additional Mounting Blocks 2-51


Using Alternative Mounting Brackets
Attaching the A800052 Soft-Mount (Non-Rotational) Mounting Base
The A800052 soft mount bracket was developed for machines with shafts or rotors
that are too large and heavy or difficult to turn like cement kilns, rock crushers,
gearboxes and hammer mills. This bracket is typically used for uncoupled align-
ments where either the Manual Sweep or Dual Pass methods are being used. It has
eight shielded ball bearings mounted at the base of the bracket so that the bracket
actually rolls around the shaft.
Nylon nuts that come in the package can be added to the chain to allow it to easily
slide over the shaft while providing a stable mounting configuration. If necessary,
install the nylon nuts through slots in the chain using the 6-32 x 1/2 inch panhead
screw (provided) so that they are evenly spaced.

2-52 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures


Before using, inspect the soft mount base to ensure that all eight ball bearings are
tight and free of play. Screw the mounting posts into each hole in the mounting
base and tighten with the supplied tightener (Phillips screwdriver) or with a 1/8
inch Allen wrench (not supplied with kit). Select the chain tightener of choice
(refer to “Attaching the B821007 Carbon Steel Mounting Base” on page 2-19 for
more information). The hex nut mechanism provides a more stable, versatile
mounting while the knurled nut is more convenient. The chain assembly should
be slipped into the mounting base so that the nylon nuts rest against the surface of
the shaft (or coupling). Hold the chain out away from the base and slip the cylinder
into its cradle. To ensure maximum tightening range, each nut should be flush
with the end of the tightening bolt.
Place the base on the shaft (or coupling); a link of chain is slipped into the T-slot to
secure the base to the shaft. The soft-mount base does not have a chain pickup like
the B821007 Carbon Steel Mounting Base. After slipping a chain link into the T-
slot, tighten the bolt at the end of the chain. Each mounting base can be installed
on either end and the chain bolts placed on either side of the shaft. Take up any
slack in the chain using the chain clip (if necessary) and mount the laser fixtures to
the posts as described in the section “Attaching the B821007 Carbon Steel
Mounting Base” on page 2-19. The following photographs show the base mounted
to a shaft. Grasping the bracket (not the laser fixtures) rotate the soft-mount base
around the shaft (or coupling).

Caution!
Grasping the laser fixtures could result in less accurate, unrepeatable data. This
is especially important when using the Dual Pass method where the data is auto-
matically acquired as one fixture passes by the other.

Caution!
Coupling run-out will severely affect the accuracy of the soft mount brackets.
Coupling run-out should be measured and subtracted from the reading during
use.

Using Alternative Mounting Brackets 2-53


Caution!
To ensure measurement accuracy, the contact surfaces of the shaft (or coupling)
must be free of dirt, grease, oil, etc. If cleaning is needed, Emerson recommends
that you use a solvent-base cleaner. Shaft keys should be avoided to reduce errors
in accuracy.

2-54 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures


Attaching the A8AA54 Narrow Mounting Base
The A8AA54, 1/2 inch (13mm) wide, narrow bracket was developed for small
machines with shaft diameters of 4 - 1/2 inches (114 mm) and below, where the
shaft can be rotated freely. Top and bottom v-shaped bars clamp snugly around the
shaft. All is held in place by any one of three fasteners: wing nuts for easy tightening,
hexagonal nuts for easy tightening in close quarters or a 1/2 inch (13mm) cou-
pling nut for especially tight spaces. The bolts are hinged and can swing freely. A
cotter pin can be inserted into the bracket to prevent the bolt from swinging.

10

Place the top v-shaped bar section (base) of the bracket on the shaft and the
bottom v-shaped bar section of the bracket on the shaft (on the opposite side of the
shaft from where the top v-shaped bar section has been placed) to secure the
bracket to the shaft. Ensure that the bolts are seated in the outer most slots of the
bottom section. When the top and bottom v-shaped bar bracket sections and bolts
are in place, tighten the nut at the end of the bolt to clamp the bracket to the shaft.

Using Alternative Mounting Brackets 2-55


Screw the mounting posts into each hole in the mounting base and tighten with
the supplied tightener (Phillips screwdriver) or with a 1/8 inch Allen wrench (not
supplied with kit). Mount the laser fixtures to the posts as described in “Attaching
the B821007 Carbon Steel Mounting Base” on page 2-19. The photograph shows
the base mounted to a shaft.

11

Note
Extension blocks are not available for this bracket.

2-56 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures


Attaching the A8AA55 Quick Mount Narrow Mounting Base
The A8AA55, 1/2 inch (13mm) wide quick mount narrow bracket is a chain type
bracket for optimal stability in tight spaces on a wide range of shaft sizes, where the
shaft can be rotated freely. The chain assembly should be slipped into the
mounting base. Hold the chain out away from the base and slip the cylinder into its
cradle. To ensure maximum tightening range, each nut should be flush with the
end of the tightening bolt.

12

Place the base on the shaft (or coupling) and a link of chain is slipped onto the pin
located on the opposite side of the bracket to secure the base to the shaft. After slip-
ping a chain link onto the pin, tighten the bolt at the end of the chain. The bracket
is held in place by a 1/2 inch (13mm) coupling nut for especially tight spaces. Each
mounting base can be installed on either end and the chain bolts placed on either
side of the shaft. Take up any slack in the chain using the hairpin chain clip (if nec-
essary).

Using Alternative Mounting Brackets 2-57


Screw the mounting posts into each hole in the mounting base and tighten with
the supplied tightener (Phillips screwdriver) or with a 1/8 inch Allen wrench (not
supplied with kit). Mount the laser fixtures to the posts as described in “Attaching
the B821007 Carbon Steel Mounting Base” on page 2-19. Once the posts are in
place, mount the laser fixtures to the posts. The photograph shows the base
mounted to a shaft.

13

Note
Extension chains and blocks are not available for this bracket.

2-58 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures


Attaching the A800056 Magnetic Mounting Base
The A800056 9/16 inches (14 mm) thick magnetic bracket was developed to
mount on the side of couplings made of ferromagnetic material. Recommended
minimum coupling diameter is 3-4 inches (75-100 mm), where the shaft can be
rotated freely. Each bracket consists of a light-weight delron housing containing
seven, powerful rare-earth magnets. The bracket lip overhangs the coupling rim to
provide extra stability. With this accessory it is possible to attach the alignment fix-
tures within seconds of tagging out a machine for so-called "hot alignment" checks.

14

Using Alternative Mounting Brackets 2-59


Screw the mounting posts into each hole in the mounting base and tighten with
the supplied tightener (Phillips screwdriver) or with a 1/8 inch Allen wrench (not
supplied with kit). Mount the laser fixtures to the posts as described in “Attaching
the B821007 Carbon Steel Mounting Base” on page 2-19. Attach the base to the
inside or outside of the coupling, depending on the coupling design and whether
or not you are performing a coupled or uncoupled alignment. The photograph
illustrates the base attached to the outside of a coupling.

15

2-60 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures


Chapter 3

Horizontal Alignment

The horizontal alignment feature of the Advanced and Basic Laser Align applica-
tions is used to collect and display alignment data for machines in which the
machine moves are accomplished at the machine feet.

Help
Depending on where you are within the program, an alignment helper may be
available at the bottom of the screen to provide you with a brief explanation of the
highlighted step or screen. In addition to the alignment helper, the functionality of
any soft key is available. This is accessed by pressing the 2130 analyzer Help key
once, and then pressing the soft key for which help is desired. Pressing the Help key
twice returns a help message for the active program screen. If further help is
required, refer to the appropriate section(s) in this manual.

Basic Alignment Steps


Three basic steps are required to complete an alignment job.
1. Define the alignment job
• Setup the job parameters.
• Enter machine dimensions.
2. Acquire alignment data
• Acquire alignment data to determine the alignment condition of the
machine.
3. Review alignment results
• Review machine moves.
• Move the machine, if necessary.

3-1
Advanced and Basic Laser Align Applications
The laser alignment program is available as an advanced laser align program
(which includes the ability to perform Basic jobs), and as a basic laser align pro-
gram (which can only perform basic alignment jobs).

Advanced Laser Align


If the Advanced Laser Align application is loaded in a 2130 analyzer, the program
can be launched from the 2130 analyzer’s Home screen by pressing the Adv Laser
Align soft key. When the advanced application is selected, you will have access to the
full functionality described throughout this manual. The ability to perform basic
laser align jobs is included in this program.

Basic Laser Align


If the Basic Laser Align application is loaded in a 2130 analyzer, the program can
be launched by pressing the Basic Laser Align soft key on the 2130 analyzer home
page. When the basic application is selected, you will have access to a subset of the
functionality described throughout this manual. Refer to the Basic Mode section
on page 3-12 for a detailed description of the functionality available in the Basic
Laser Align application.

3-2 Horizontal Alignment


Main Screen
The main Laser Align Application screen (sometimes referred to as the Main
Menu) allows you to monitor progress throughout the alignment job. When a hor-
izontal alignment job is active, the Main screen displays as illustrated below.

Laser Align Application Main screen at job start

The application defaults to a predefined setup when a new job is created. The type
of job, Job ID, Equipment ID, alignment method, number of machine moves, and
number of notes attached to the job are displayed in the upper portion of the main
screen.

Note
Unless otherwise noted, any defaults listed are displayed only at first.
Once a field is modified from the default, the program uses the latest
entry for that field.

Main Screen 3-3


The steps required to perform an alignment are displayed in the center portion of
the main screen. The 2130 Laser Align program leads you through each step of a
routine alignment procedure starting with the Enter Dimensions selection at the
Main screen. Once an alignment job has started the next uncompleted step in the
recommended procedure is highlighted.
An [X] signifies a completed step. As you complete steps, the next recommended
step is highlighted. Initially, the Move Machine step is displayed, but grayed out
until you’ve completed first two required steps which are critical to the alignment
jobs.

Up and Down Arrow keys


Use the Up and Down Arrow keys to highlight each feature. If you select an inactive
step, a popup message reminds you that the selected step is inactive due to missing
information.

3-4 Horizontal Alignment


Three Step Alignment
To simulate the basic steps required to complete a horizontal alignment job, the
2130 Laser Align main screen is set up to allow an alignment job to be performed
using the following three steps:
1. enter dimensions,
• enter machine dimensions
• if thermal growth is enabled, enter thermal growth information; otherwise,
this step is skipped
2. sweep laser heads,
• if foot pre-check is enabled, perform Soft Foot or FDI check; otherwise, this
step is skipped
• acquire alignment data to determine the alignment condition of the
machine
3. move machine
• review vertical moves
• review horizontal moves
• perform a live move (optional) and move the machine.

Three Step Alignment 3-5


Main Screen Function Keys
Enter Dimensions
Use the Enter Dimensions key to advance to the Edit Dimensions screen where the
dimensions for the machine being aligned can be entered. This is the first step of
the three-key operation used in performing an alignment job. If thermal growth is
enabled, thermal growth information can also be entered from under this step.
Refer to the Enter Dimensions section on page 3-45 for more information.

Sweep Laser Heads


Use the Sweep Laser Heads key to advance to the data acquisition screen for the
alignment method defined for the job. This is the second step of the three-key
operation used in performing an alignment job. From this screen alignment data
needed to determine the alignment condition of the machine is acquired. If foot
pre-check is enabled, a Soft Foot or FDI check can also be performed from under
this step. Refer to the Sweep Laser Heads section on page 3-75 for more informa-
tion.

Move Machine
Use the Move Machine key to advance to the Vertical Move screen where the
machine moves and alignment condition for the vertical direction can be reviewed.
This is the third step of the three-key operation used in performing an alignment
job. After the Vertical Move screen, the program advances to the Horizontal Move
screen where the machine moves and alignment condition for the horizontal
direction can be reviewed. If an alignment correction is necessary that requires a
live move, this can also be done from under this step. Refer to the Move Machine
section on page 3-129 for more information.

Note
The Enter key will perform the same function as the soft key for the
highlighted program step. In addition, the Enter key can be used to
advance you through an alignment job from beginning-to-end using
the job parameters and flow setup on the Alt Main screen.

3-6 Horizontal Alignment


Alt Main Screen
The Alt Main screen (also known as the Main Menu Alt2 screen) allows you to
setup alignment job parameters and job flow. The Alt Main screen is reached by
pressing the Alt key on the Main screen.

Laser Align Application Alt Main (Advanced Mode)

Alt Main Screen 3-7


Alt Main Screen Function Keys
Notes
Use the Notes key to advance to the Notes screens where notes can be assigned to
the current job. In addition to the predefined notes, user defined notes can also be
created and assigned to the current job from under this option. Refer to the Notes
section on page 3-180 for more information.

Job Mode
Use the Job Mode key to toggle the mode of the job between Advanced and Basic.
When the job is set to Advanced Mode, then you have all the laser alignment func-
tionality described in this document. When the job is set to Basic Mode, then you
have a subset of the functionality defined in this document. Refer to the Basic
Mode section on page 3-12 for a detailed description of the functionality available
in the Basic Mode.
Before switching modes, a warning message will be displayed asking you if this is
truly the operation to be performed. If you answer yes, then any data stored on the
job or any settings other than the defaults will be cleared and you will remain at the
Alt Main screen. If you answer no, then the operation is aborted and you will
remain at the Alt Main screen.

Machine Config
Use the Machine Config key to advance to the Machine Configuration screen
where the machine components for the job can be defined. Refer to the Machine
Configuration section on page 3-17 for more information.

Laser Align Method


Use the Laser Align Method key to define the alignment method for the job. Refer
to the Laser Align Method section on page 3-19 for more information.

Tolerance Type
Use the Tolerance Type key to define the alignment tolerance type for the job.
Refer to the Tolerance Type section on page 3-22 for more information.

Exit Laser Align


Use the Exit Laser Align key to exit the Laser Alignment program and advance to
the 2130 analyzer’s Home screen.

3-8 Horizontal Alignment


Laser Config
Use the Laser Config key to advance to the Laser Configuration screen where the
laser head and analyzer addresses can be reviewed and set, and the Laser Head A
and B locations can be set. Refer to the Laser Configuration section on page 3-23
for more information.

Job Manager
Use the Job Manager key to advance to the Job Manager screens where a new job
can be created from scratch using default job setups, a new job can be created using
the job setup from an existing job, selected alignment jobs can be deleted from the
analyzer, and jobs can be transferred to and from the PC. Refer to the Job Manager
section on page 3-34 for more information.

Job Flow
Use the Job Flow key to define certain job flow parameters for the job. These
parameters consist of entering thermal growth information, performing a foot pre-
check, defining live move options, enabling a live move audible tone and flashing
LED option, and reviewing and averaging multiple acquisitions together. Refer to
the Job Flow section on page 3-42 for more information.

Print Job
The Print Job key prints a summary report of the current job to the Virtual Printer,
if the Virtual Printer is enabled under the General Setup screen of the System Firm-
ware. A summary report includes job information, notes, soft foot data, and
reading set data (machine feet moves and Angle/Offset data). The report includes
only the first and last reading sets that were acquired. The summary report will be
similar to the report displayed on page 3-10.

Alt Main Screen Function Keys 3-9


3-10 Horizontal Alignment
Job Reset
The Job Reset key allows the operator to “Clear Job Data,” “Load Default Values,”
or “Load Default Tolerances.”

Clear Job Data


Use the Clear Job Data function to clear all stored data and notes from the active
job. Before any data is cleared, a warning message will be displayed asking the oper-
ator if this is truly the operation to be performed. If the operator answers yes, then
the data stored on the job will be cleared and the operator is taken back to the Main
screen. If the operator answers no, then the operation is aborted and you will
return to the Alt Main screen.

Load Default Values


Use the Load Default Values function to load job default parameters. Before any
defaults are loaded, a warning message will be displayed asking the operator if this
is truly the operation to be performed. If the operator answers yes, then the job
defaults are loaded and all job data is cleared and the operator remains at the Alt
Main screen. If the operator answers no, then the operation is aborted and the
operator remains at the Alt Main screen.

Load Default Tolerances


Use the Load Default Tolerances function to load default alignment tolerances.
Before any defaults are loaded, a warning message will be displayed asking the
operator if this is truly the operation to be performed. If the operator answers yes,
then the default alignment tolerances are loaded and the operator remains at the
Alt Main screen. If the operator answers no, then the operation is aborted and the
operator remains at the Alt Main screen.

Alt Main Screen Function Keys 3-11


Basic Mode
When running the Basic Laser Align application in the 2130 analyzer, or when the
Job Mode in the Advanced Laser Align application is set to Basic, the functionality
described throughout this manual will be limited to the subset described in this sec-
tion.

Laser Align Application Alt Main (Basic Mode)

Except for differences in the alignment job parameters available under the Alt
Main screen, the procedure for performing a basic alignment is exactly as it is for
an advanced alignment. The Alt Main screen is reached by pressing the Alt key on
the Main screen.

3-12 Horizontal Alignment


Basic Mode Function Keys
Notes
This option functions exactly the same as is does for Advanced Horizontal jobs.
Refer to the Notes section on page 3-180 for more information.

Job Mode
When a 2130 analyzer is running the Advanced Laser Align application, the Job
Mode soft key functions as described in the section “Job Mode ” on page 3-8. From
Job Mode, the user can configure the active job to be run in the “Basic Mode”.
When running the Basic Laser Align application in a 2130 analyzer, the only mode
of the laser alignment program which is available is the Basic mode, so the Job
Mode soft key is disabled.

Machine Config
Machine component names can not be changed in basic mode; therefore, the
option to do so is not available. All basic horizontal jobs use “Mach A” as the left
machine component and “Mach B” as the right machine component.

Laser Align Method


Use the Laser Align Method key to toggle the alignment method between the only
two options available in Basic mode: Auto Sweep (default) and Manual 4 Point.
Refer to the Acquiring Alignment Data section on page 3-82 for more information
about these two methods. In Basic mode:
• When Auto Sweep is selected, the Mode option can not be changed; there-
fore, it is not available. All basic horizontal jobs use the Standard Mode.
• When Manual 4 Point is selected, the Sample Rate option can not be
changed; therefore, it is not available. All basic horizontal jobs use a Sample
Rate of 2. Also, the Sample Rate can not be changed from the Laser Head
Status screen.
Refer to the Laser Align Method section on page 3-19 for more information about
the Mode of operation and Sample Rate.

Basic Mode Function Keys 3-13


Tolerance Type
Use the Tolerance Type key to toggle the alignment tolerance type between the
only two options available in Basic mode: Standard (default) and Jackshaft. Refer
to the Tolerance Type section on page 3-22 and the Tolerances section on page
3-193 for more information. In Basic mode:
• When Standard is selected, the Estimate F Dim option can not be changed;
therefore, it is not available. All basic horizontal jobs allow the program to
estimate the F dimension to be one half of the C dimension.

Exit Laser Align


Use the Exit Laser Align key to exit the Laser Alignment program and advance you
to the 2130 analyzer’s Home screen.

Laser Config
Use the Laser Config key to advance to the Laser Configuration screen where the
laser head and analyzer addresses can be reviewed and set. Refer to the Laser Con-
figuration section on page 3-23 for more information. In Basic mode:
• The Laser Head A and B locations can not be changed; therefore, the
option to do so is not available. For all basic horizontal jobs, Laser Head A
must be located on the left machine and Laser Head B must be located on
the right machine.

Job Manager
Use the job Manager key to advance to the Job Manager screens where a new job
can be created from scratch using default job setups, a new job can be created using
the job setup from an existing job, selected alignment jobs can be deleted from the
analyzer, and jobs can be transferred to and from the PC. Refer to the Job Manager
section on page 3-34 for more information. In Basic Laser Align application:
• Jobs can not be transferred to and from the PC; therefore, the option to do
so is not available.
• The alignment tolerance table can not be transferred from the PC into the
analyzer. All Basic Horizontal jobs created in the Basic Laser Align applica-
tion use the CSI default tolerance values available in the analyzer.
• Only Basic Horizontal jobs can be created; therefore, the option to create,
other types of jobs (e.g. Advanced Horizontal, Vertical, and Straightness
jobs) is not available.

3-14 Horizontal Alignment


• If accessing an external memory card, only Basic Horizontal jobs can be
viewed and edited; therefore, if the card were to contain any Advanced Hor-
izontal jobs they would not be available.

Job Flow
Since thermal growth information is the only Job Flow parameter that can be spec-
ified, the Job Flow option is not available. In Basic mode:
• If enabled, thermal growth information can only be entered at the feet.
• Only an FDI Foot Pre-Check can be performed, but only from the data
acquisition screen.
• Live moves can only be performed in the horizontal direction.
• The live move audible tone and flashing LED option is disabled.
• Results from multiple acquisitions can not be reviewed and averaged
together.

Thermal Growth
Use the Thermal Growth key to define whether or not thermal growth informa-
tion at the feet is to be entered for the job. When selected, the selection is toggled
between being enabled and disabled (default). When this option is enabled, you
are able to input the amount of vertical and horizontal thermal growth at each
machine foot. Refer to the Entering Thermal Growth Information section on
page 3-56 for more information.

Print Job
The Print Job key prints a summary report of the current job to the Virtual Printer,
if the Virtual Printer is enabled under the General Setup screen of the System Firm-
ware. A summary report includes job information, notes, soft foot data, and
reading set data (machine feet moves and Angle/Offset data). The report includes
only the first and last reading sets that were acquired. The summary report will be
similar to the report displayed on page 3-10.

Basic Mode Function Keys 3-15


Job Reset
The Job Reset key allows the operator to “Clear Job Data,” “Load Default Values,”
or “Load Default Tolerances.”

Clear Job Data


Use the Clear Job Data function to clear all stored data and notes from the active
job. Before any data is cleared, a warning message will be displayed asking the oper-
ator if this is truly the operation to be performed. If the operator answers yes, then
the data stored on the job will be cleared and the operator is taken back to the Main
screen. If the operator answers no, then the operation is aborted and you will
return to the Alt Main screen.

Load Defaults Values


Use the Load Default Values function to load job default parameters. Before any
defaults are loaded, a warning message will be displayed asking the operator if this
is truly the operation to be performed. If the operator answers yes, then the job
defaults are loaded and all job data is cleared and the operator remains at the Alt
Main screen. If the operator answers no, then the operation is aborted and the
operator remains at the Alt Main screen.

Load Default Tolerances


Use the Load Default Tolerances function to load default alignment tolerances.
Before any defaults are loaded, a warning message will be displayed asking the
operator if this is truly the operation to be performed. If the operator answers yes,
then the default alignment tolerances are loaded and the operator remains at the
Alt Main screen. If the operator answers no, then the operation is aborted and the
operator remains at the Alt Main screen.
Since the application cannot communicate with PC (for the Basic Align application
running in the 2130 analyzer) the only tolerance values available are the CSI
default values.
The Advanced Laser Align application, when configured to run in the Basic Mode,
can use User Defined tolerance values because the program can communicate
with a PC, and download tolerance tables.

3-16 Horizontal Alignment


Machine Configuration
From the Machine Configuration screen you can select the machine components
for the current job. The Machine Configuration screen is reached by pressing the
Machine Config key on the Alt Main screen.

Machine Configuration Screen

When this option is first selected, the machine type defined for the left machine will
be highlighted by a red box around the machine type by default. The default
machine types for the left and right machines are “Mach A” and “Mach B”.

Up, Down, Left, and Right Arrow keys


Use Up, Down, Left, and Right Arrow keys to select between each of the machine
types.

Basic Mode Function Keys 3-17


When “Other” is selected as the machine type you can enter a machine name (up
to 7 characters in length). The following machine types can be defined for the job:

Machine Types

Machine Configuration Function Keys

Select Left Machine


Use the Select Left Machine key to set the left machine component to the machine
type highlighted by the red box.

Select Right Machine


Use the Select Right Machine key to set the right machine component to the
machine type highlighted by the red box.

3-18 Horizontal Alignment


Laser Align Method
From the Laser Align (Alignment) Method subwindow you can select the align-
ment method for the current job. The Laser Align (Alignment) Method sub-
window is reached by pressing the Laser Align Method key on the Alt Main screen.

Alignment Method Subwindow

Basic Mode Function Keys 3-19


Laser Align (Alignment) Method Function Keys
Method
Use the Method key to select the alignment method. The choices are: Auto Sweep
(default), Dual Pass, Manual Sweep, Auto 4 Point, and Manual 4 Point. Refer to the
Acquiring Alignment Data section on page 3-82 for more information.

Mode
Use the Mode key, if the alignment method is Auto Sweep or Manual, to define the
mode of operation for the alignment method defined. When selected, the mode
is toggled between Standard (default) and Averaging.
The Standard mode of operation is the mode that is most often used during hori-
zontal alignments. In this mode of operation, once the direction of rotation is
defined by the laser heads, any previous data stored is overwritten by any new data
acquired at the same angular position.
The Averaging mode of operation is intended to allow multiple sampling of data in
order to reduce the noise in the data by averaging all of the acquired values. In this
mode of operation, once the direction of rotation is defined by the laser heads, any
previous data stored is averaged with any new data acquired at the same angular
position if the laser head has been moved at least 20° in the reverse direction or a
full 360° sweep is performed.

Target Window
Use the Target Window key, if the alignment method is Dual Pass, to set the Target
Window. The choices are: 10%, 25%, 50%, 75%, or 100% (default). The Target
Window determines the size of the valid data window around the vertical centerline
of the other laser head's Position Sensing Detector (PSD) in which data is to be
acquired as the laser beam passes across the PSD. No data is acquired as the laser
beam passes across the PSD outside of the valid data window. Typically a Target
Window of 100% is sufficient, but for increased accuracy and repeatability you may
want to decrease the size of the Target Window to ensure that data is being
acquired as close to the PSD's vertical centerline as possible.

3-20 Horizontal Alignment


Note
If a lower percentage (smaller valid window) is selected, a slower rota-
tional speed may be required especially with a smaller PSD (e.g. with
the 10x10mm PSD on the 8215). For example, a 10% Target
Window would define a 2mm wide window on an 8225 and a 1mm
wide window on an 8215 centered around the PSD's vertical center-
line in which data will be acquired as the laser beam passes across the
window.

Sample Rate
Use the Sample Rate key, if the alignment method is Manual, Auto 4 Point, or
Manual 4 Point, to set the number of samples (in the range 1 to 25) to be averaged
together to generate a single reading. Two samples (default) are typically sufficient,
but for example, if too much background vibration is present you may want to
increase the number of samples to 25. This option can also be changed after the
job has been created from the Laser Head Status screen.

Laser Align (Alignment) Method Function Keys 3-21


Tolerance Type
From the Tolerance Type subwindow you can select the tolerance type for the cur-
rent job. The Tolerance Type subwindow is reached by pressing the Tolerance
Type key on the Alt Main screen.

Tolerance Type Subwindow

Tolerance Type Function Keys

Tolerance Type
Use the Tolerance Type key to define the tolerance type for the job. When selected,
the selection is toggled between Standard (default) and Jackshaft.
Standard tolerances are the combination of offset and angle. This tolerance type is
a direct indication of the alignment condition. Optimum alignment occurs when
offset and angle are zero.

3-22 Horizontal Alignment


Jackshaft tolerances are used when the laser heads are mounted 20 or more inches
apart. In these cases, Standard Tolerances are the less practical to use. This method
measures the two angles between the shafts. Optimum alignment occurs when the
two angles are zero.
Refer to the Tolerances section on page 3-193 for more information.

Estimate F Dim
Use the Estimate F Dim key if the Tolerance Type is Standard in order to define
whether the F dimension is to be estimated. When selected, it is toggled between
being enabled and disabled (default). When enabled, the program will estimate
the F dimension to be one half of the C dimension. If the Tolerance Type is Jack-
shaft, the F dimension is not required.
Laser Configuration
From the Laser Configuration screen you can configure the location for each of
the laser heads during the alignment, check and set the heads and analyzer
address, and check the operational status of the heads. The Laser Configuration
screen is reached by pressing the Laser Config key on the Alt Main screen.

Laser Configuration Screen

Laser Align (Alignment) Method Function Keys 3-23


The location of each head is based on how the machines are viewed. It does not
matter which head is put on which machine; however, the analyzer must know each
head’s location.

Caution!
Selecting the proper configuration for the laser heads is extremely important! If
the setting is wrong, all of the machine move calculations will be incorrect.

Although both Head A and Head B of the older version of Model 8215/8225 laser
heads have gray front panels with black grid lines, A and B are marked on the front
panel of the laser head. The newer version of the Model 8215/8225 laser heads
have A and B marked on the front panel, and in addition can be distinguished by
the color of the front panels. Head A has a gray front panel with white grid lines
while Head B has a blue front panel, also with white grid lines.

Note
A routine in the program is used to sense whether the Model 8215 or
the Model 8225 laser heads are being used.

Laser Configuration Function Keys

Change Laser Config


Use the Change Laser Config key to toggle configuration of the laser heads. The
display must be set to match the actual location for each of the laser heads based on
how the machines are to be viewed during the alignment.

Laser Address Selection


Use the Laser Address Selection key to check and set the head and analyzer
addresses.

Check Lasers
Use the Check Lasers key to check the operational status of the heads. Refer to the
Check Lasers section on page 3-108 for more information.

3-24 Horizontal Alignment


Resend Data
Use the Resend Data key to resend data from the laser heads. This key is active
when the alignment method is set to Auto Sweep or Dual Pass on the Alt Laser Con-
figuration screen. This option is useful if for some reason the data transfer from the
heads to the analyzer was aborted before completion. Once retrieval is complete, a
check of the data will be made. Once this is complete, you will be advanced to the
main screen where the Move Machine program step will be highlighted.

Note
Data stored in the laser heads clears when they are turned off or when
initialized.

Laser Align (Alignment) Method Function Keys 3-25


Laser Address Selection
From the Current Addresses screen you can review, read, and set the laser head
(Models 821500 and 822500 only) and the analyzer addresses. The Current
Addresses screen is reached by pressing the Laser Address Selection key on the
Laser Configuration screen.

Current Addresses Screen

From this screen only the addresses setup in the analyzer and not the addresses
setup in the laser heads themselves are displayed. To review the actual address setup
in Head A, with Head A turned on and Head B turned off, select Read Head A
Address. To review the actual address setup in Head B, with Head B turned on and
Head A turned off, select Read Head B Address.

3-26 Horizontal Alignment


Laser addressing is necessary when using either direct connect or RF communica-
tions. If one laser system (a system consists of a pair of laser heads and an analyzer)
using RF communication is operating in close proximity to another laser system
using RF communication, this option prevents the two from interfering with each
other. In this situation, all but one of the laser systems could use direct connect
cables to communicate instead of RF communication, or the addresses of each
laser system can be changed so that each laser system has a different address than
the other.
For example, one laser system can have the address of its Head A set to 1, Head B
to 2, and analyzer to 11 while the other laser system can have the address of its Head
A set to 3, Head B to 4, and analyzer to 12. A maximum of 5 laser systems commu-
nicating RF can be configured to operate using different addresses.
The definition of “operating in close proximity” will vary from one environment to
another. For example, in one plant any laser system operating within 50 feet (15m)
of each other could have RF interference due to the other laser system while in
another plant any laser system operating within 200 feet (61m) of each other could
have RF interference due to the other laser system.
Refer to Communication Between the Fixtures and Analyzer on page 2-32 for
more information.

Laser Address Selection 3-27


Read Head A Address key
Use the Read Head A Address key to read and set the address in Head A. To read
and set the laser head addresses the direct connect cable must be attached to each
of the laser heads and the analyzer first before this option is selected. After the
direct connect cable is attached, turn Head A on and leave Head B turned off.

Received Address Subwindow

When the Received Address subwindow is displayed the actual address setup in
Head A also displays. If the address is not correct or you wish to change it, type in
the new address from 1 (default) to 10, then press the Enter key to accept the
change and return to the Current Addresses screen. The new address must be dif-
ferent than the Head B address. If the address is correct, press Enter to return to
the Current Addresses screen.

Caution!
When connecting any device to the RS232 serial port located on the top panel of
the analyzer, the analyzer must be turned off.

3-28 Horizontal Alignment


Note
If you enter a number outside the range of 1 to 10 or try to enter two
addresses which are the same, you will get a warning telling you of the
error. Should this happen, press the Enter key to continue and repeat
the procedure.

Read Head B Address key


Use the Read Head B Address key to read and set the address in Head B. The pro-
cedure for Head B is the same as described above for Head A, except in this case
Head B is turned on and Head A is turned off. If a new address is entered it must
be different than the Head A address.

Set Analyzer Address key


Use the Set Analyzer Address key to read and set the address in the analyzer. The
analyzer address can be set from 11 (default) to 15.

Note
If you enter a number outside the range of 11 to 15 you will get a
warning telling you of the error. If this occurs, press the Enter key to
continue and repeat the procedure.

Laser Address Selection 3-29


Check Lasers
From the Laser Head Status screen you can check the operational status of the
heads and change the sample rate. The Laser Head Status screen is reached by
pressing the Check Lasers key on the Laser Configuration screen.

Laser Head Status Screen (show bar graphs)

3-30 Horizontal Alignment


Laser Head Status Screen (show numbers)

Note
Both laser heads need to be turned on for this option to function
properly.

Laser Address Selection 3-31


Laser Head Status Function Keys

Show Numbers
Use the Show Numbers key to replace the Battery, Laser, and Sensor bar graphs
with numbers as illustrated above in “Laser Head Status Screen (show numbers)”
on page 3-31.

Show Bar Graphs


Use the Show Bar Graphs key to replace the Battery, Laser, and Sensor numbers
with bar graphs as illustrated above in “Laser Head Status Screen (show bar
graphs)” on page 3-30.

Increase Sample Rate


Use the Increase Sample Rate key to increase the sample rate of the laser heads.
When acquiring alignment data under the Sweep Laser Heads step - if the align-
ment method is Manual, Auto 4 Point, or Manual 4 Point, this key is used to set the
number of samples (in the range 1 to 25) to be averaged together to generate a
single reading when acquiring alignment data. Two samples (default) are typically
sufficient, but if too much background vibration is present, for example, you may
want to increase the number of samples to 25. This option can also be changed
from the Alignment Method subwindow.
When acquiring alignment data under the Sweep Laser Heads step, if the align-
ment method is Auto Sweep or Dual Pass, the sample rate can not be changed.

Decrease Sample Rate


Use the Increase Sample Rate key similarly as you would the Increase Sample Rate
key except this key is used to decrease the sample rate of the laser heads.

Hide Laser Angle


Use the Hide Laser Angle key to hide the laser angle. This key is active when the
alignment method is set to Manual 4 Point on the Alt Laser Head Status screen.
This option can also be changed after the job has been created from the Alt screen
of the Manual 4 Point acquisition and Live Move options.
This option is necessary when performing alignments on vertically mounted
machinery where the movement is at the feet instead of a flange and on machinery
where the clock positions relative to vertical and horizontal base movements of the
machine are nonstandard.

3-32 Horizontal Alignment


Show Laser Angle
Use the Show Laser Angle key similarly as you would the Hide Laser Angle key
except this key is used to show the laser angle if it is hidden.

Laser Address Selection 3-33


Job Manager
From the Job Manager screen you can perform job related tasks (e.g. creating,
editing, deleting, transferring, copying, and activating jobs). In addition to jobs,
alignment tolerances can also be transferred from the PC to the analyzer. The Job
Manager screen is reached by pressing the Job Manager key on the Alt Main screen.

Job Manager Screen

The Job ID and Equipment Description defined for the highlighted job displays on
the upper section of the screen. The active location displays just below the job infor-
mation. The list of jobs stored on the active location displays on the lower section of
the screen.
When this screen displays, the active job is highlighted. If no jobs are stored on the
active location, the message “No Jobs Found” displays.

3-34 Horizontal Alignment


Job Manager Function Keys

Create New Job


Use the Create New Job key to create a new default horizontal job and advance you
to the Edit Job screen. Refer to the Edit Job Setup section on page 3-38 for more
information.

Change Location
Use the Change Location key to change the memory location where jobs are
stored. This key is only active if at least one external memory card is installed in the
analyzer.

Edit This Job


Use the Edit This Job key to advance to the Edit Job screen. Jobs may be edited from
here. If the highlighted job is not the active job, then it is made the active job before
advancing to the Edit Job screen. Refer to the Edit Job Setup section on page 3-38
for more information.

Select/Unselect
Use the Select/Unselect key to choose the highlighted job (place a check mark just
to the left of the job name). If the job has already been selected, clear the check-
mark to remove the job. (This operation does not delete the job).

Select/Unselect All
Use the Select/Unselect All key to select all jobs (place a check mark just to the left
of all job names) and remove all jobs(clear all check marks). (This operation does
not delete the job).

Delete Selected Jobs


Use the Delete Selected Jobs key to delete the selected jobs. Before any job is
deleted, a warning message displays asking if this is the operation you desire to per-
form. If you answer yes, then the selected jobs will be deleted. If you answer no, then
the operation is aborted. This key is only active when at least one job has been
selected.

Laser Address Selection 3-35


Caution!
Use extreme caution with the delete jobs option when the analyzer contains
important alignment data. Once you answer yes to the warning message all
data on the selected jobs will be lost.

Note
Alignment jobs can also be deleted from under the File Utility option.
Alignment jobs have a .LJB file extension. Refer to the File Utility sec-
tion of the Model 2130 Machinery Analyzer User’s Guide (P/N
97017) for more information.

Connect for Transfer


Use the Connect for Transfer key to transfer jobs to and from the PC. In addition
to jobs, alignment tolerances can also be transferred from the PC to the analyzer.
Refer to the Transferring Alignment Job Data and Tolerances section on page
3-184 for more information.
In the Basic Laser Align program, jobs can not be transferred to and from the PC;
therefore this option is not available.

Copy Job
Use the Copy Job key to create a copy of the highlighted job. Before the job is
copied, you are given the choice of copying the job with all acquired data or without
the acquired data. The highlighted job will be copied using the next available job
number.

Activate Job
Use the Activate job key to activate the highlighted job and advance to the Main
screen. The Enter key can be used to do the same.

Note
When the Laser Align program is activated - if the last active job can
not be located, a message displays instructing the user to proceed to
Job Manager and either select another job or create a new job.

3-36 Horizontal Alignment


Job Up and Down Arrows
Use the Job Up and Down Arrow keys to scroll through the list of jobs one at a time.
The highlighted job will toggle from top to bottom and vise versa with these keys.
The keys are only active when more than one job is listed.

Page Up and Down Arrows


Use the Page Up and Down Arrow keys to scroll through the list of jobs one page
at a time. These keys are only active when more than one page of jobs is listed.

Laser Address Selection 3-37


Edit Job Setup
Press the Edit This Job soft key to advance to the Edit Job Setup screen where the
job parameters used for job identification and storage may be edited. The Edit Job
Setup screen is reached by pressing the Edit This Job key on the Job Manager
screen.

Edit Job Setup Screen

3-38 Horizontal Alignment


Edit Job Setup Function Keys

Edit Job ID
Use the Edit Job ID key to edit the Job ID. This option provides for the creation of
a unique ID useful for identifying the job. For example, it could be tied back to the
work order number, etc. The Job ID must be a minimum of 1 character and a max-
imum of 10 characters. The Job ID can not contain any of the illegal characters: ? *
. : / \ | “ < > #.
The Job ID is displayed:
• in the upper section of the main screen (for the active job);
• on the left side of the Job Manager screen (for all jobs listed).
When transferring a job defined in the analyzer to the PC, it will be transferred to
UltraMgr as an unassigned job. After the job transfer completes, the job should be
assigned to its machine. The Equip ID, Equip Desc, and Area will be modified to
match their assignment within UltraMgr.
If no machine or station exists (in the UltraMgr database), they can be created after
the job has been transferred. You can then complete the job assignment.

Note
If the job is defined within UltraMgr, the Equip ID, Equip Descrip-
tion, Area, and Coupling cannot be modified within the analyzer.

Note
When transferring a job from the analyzer to the PC, if a job with the
same date and time exists in the storage location (unassigned or
assigned), the job will be stored as a new job if the job number differs.
If a job with the same job number, but a different date and time exists
in the storage location, the job will be stored as a new job. If a job with
the same date and job number exists, then an error will be displayed
and the job does not upload.

Laser Address Selection 3-39


Edit Equip ID
Use the Edit Equip ID key to edit the Equipment ID. This option is useful for iden-
tifying the equipment being aligned. The Equipment ID is displayed in the upper
section of the main screen (for the active job). The Equipment ID can be a max-
imum of 10 characters.

Edit Equip Desc


Use the Edit Equip Desc key to edit the Equipment Description. This option is
useful for adding additional information to identify the equipment being aligned.
The Equipment Job Description can be a maximum of 28 characters.

Edit Area
Use the Edit Area key to edit the Area Description. This option is useful for identi-
fying where the equipment being aligned is located. The Area Description can be
a maximum of 32 characters.

Edit Coupling Number


Use the Edit Coupling Number key to edit the Coupling Number. This option is
useful if the machinery being aligned has more than one coupling. Each coupling
should have a unique number. An example would be a machinery train consisting
of a motor, a gearbox, and a compressor. The coupling between the motor and
gearbox should be 1 and the coupling between the gearbox and compressor
should be 2. The Coupling Number must be in the range 1 (default) to 10.

Set Mode
Use the Set Mode key to toggle the alignment mode of the job between horizontal
(default), vertical, and straightness. Refer to the appropriate sections for informa-
tion about these modes.
The job mode is displayed:
• in the upper section of the main screen (for the active job),
• in the center of the Job Manager screen (for all jobs listed).
If you attempt to change the job mode after the job has been created, a warning
messge displays asking if this is the operation to be performed. If accepted, the
alignment mode of the job is changed.
• any changes made to the job setup will be cleared,

3-40 Horizontal Alignment


• any of the information setup under Edit Job Setup does not clear since this
information is common to each of the modes,
• any data stored on the job clears,
• the default setup conditions for the mode specified (except for the informa-
tion setup under Edit Job Setup) loads into the job.
If you answer no, then the operation is aborted.
In the Basic Laser Align Program, only horizontal alignment jobs can be created;
therefore, this option is not available.

Edit User ID
Use the Edit User ID key to edit the User ID. This option is useful for identifying
who performed the alignment. Normally, it will be the user’s initials. The User ID
can be a maximum of 3 characters.

Laser Address Selection 3-41


Job Flow
From the Job Flow subwindow, select which optional parameters are to be included
or excluded as part of the job flow for the current job. These optional parameters
include: entering thermal growth inputs, performing a foot pre-check, performing
a vertical live move, enabling an audible tone and flashing LED during a live move,
and review alignment results and data averaging.
The Job Flow subwindow displays by pressing the Job Flow key on the Alt Main
screen.

Job Flow Subwindow

3-42 Horizontal Alignment


Job Flow Function Keys

Thermal Growth
Use the Thermal Growth key to define the type of Thermal Growth for the current
job. The choices are: No Thermal Growth (default), At Feet, At Profile, Gap/
Offset, Face/Rim, and Reverse Dial. Refer to the Entering Thermal Growth Infor-
mation section on page 3-56 for more information.

Note
All machine dimensions are required for thermal growth inputs to be
taken into account; therefore, if a machine has been configured as a
“Fixed” machine this key is not available.

Foot Pre-Check
Use the Foot Pre-Check key to define the type of Foot Pre-Check to be performed
on the current job. The choices are: No Foot Pre-Check (default), Soft Foot, and
Frame Distortion Index. Refer to the Foot Pre-Check section on page 3-76 for
more information.

Live Move
Use the Live Move key to define whether a live move can be accomplished in the
vertical direction. When selected, Live Move toggles between Horizontal Only
(default) and Vertical and Horizontal. When Horizontal Only is selected, the Live
Move option is not active on the Vertical Move screen. On the Dual Move screen,
the live move can only be performed in the horizontal direction. Refer to the Move
Machine section on page 3-129 for more information.

Enable Alert
Use the Enable Alert key to enable or disable (default) the live move audible tone
and flashing LED option during a live move. When the Enable Alert option is
enabled, the analyzer LED will flash when the machine alignment condition
reaches the target tolerance values. Increasing and decreasing flashes indicate
when the machine alignment crosses through the acceptable and excellent toler-
ance condition thresholds described above. The number of flashes and flash rate
will be consistent with the audible tone generated when the machine alignment
condition reaches the target tolerance values.

Laser Address Selection 3-43


If the Status Beeper option located under the 2130 analyzer’s Home/General
Setup screen is enabled and the Enable Alert option is enabled, the audible tone
will be generated as described above, but if the Status Beeper option located under
the 2130 analyzer’s Home/General Setup screen is disabled and the Enable Alert
option is enabled, the audible tone will not be generated as described above. In this
case only the analyzer LED will flash as described above.
When the Enable Alert option is disabled, the analyzer LED will not flash and an
audible tone will not be generated when the machine alignment condition reaches
the target tolerance values.

Review Results
Use the Review Results key to enable or disable (default) the Review Results option
in the Job Flow. When enabled, you are able to review and average together the
results from multiple acquisitions. Refer to the Review Results section on page
3-124 for more information.

3-44 Horizontal Alignment


Enter Dimensions
The Enter Dimensions screen allows you to enter the dimensions for the machine
being aligned. If thermal growth is enabled, thermal growth information can also
be entered from under this step. The Enter Dimensions screen is reached by
pressing the Enter Dimensions key on the Main screen.

Note
This section assumes that the fixtures are set up to the point that the
laser heads are mounted.

Enter Dimensions Screen (both machines moveable)

Laser Address Selection 3-45


Enter Dimensions Screen (right machine fixed)

Note
When a machine has been configured as a “Fixed” machine (as
shown in the second figure above) the program will not require any
dimensions to be entered for that machine. Although dimensions
are not required for this machine, without them, no machine moves
for that machine can be given.

The machine RPM should be unique for each coupling that is defined for this job.
If you have a variable speed machine, enter the highest RPM at which the coupling
operates. Also, if a coupling design has shafts operating at different speeds enter the
larger of the two. This parameter is used to establish alignment tolerances.
Although you are not required to enter the RPM before acquiring data, it is
required before any results can be viewed. The range of values that can be entered
for the RPM are 1 to 99999 RPM.

3-46 Horizontal Alignment


Dimensions can be expressed in either inches or millimeters (mm), depending on
the analyzer units. The range of values that can be entered for the A, C, and E
dimensions are 0.01 to 3600 inches and 0.254 to 91440 mm. The range of values
that can be entered for the B, D, and F dimensions are -3600 to 3600 inches and
--91440 to 91440 mm.
When entering any of the machine dimensions, they should be measured and
extended to the nearest 1/8 inch (3 mm) with the exception of dimension C.
Dimension C should be measured to the nearest 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). Refer to the
Entering Fractions section on page 3-51 for information about entering fractions.
In addition to the RPM, the C and F dimensions (if using standard tolerances) are
required to calculate and view the machine’s alignment condition available in the
Move Machine function. If any of these parameters have not been entered, a
warning message will be displayed before continuing. The warning message will
prompt you to verify that you want to proceed without the required information. If
you answer yes, then you will advance to the next step in the procedure. Also, if the
C dimension is missing and the Foot Pre-Check option has been enabled, it will be
disabled before advancing. If you answer no, then the operation is aborted and you
remain at the Enter Dimensions screen.
If only the RPM and C and F dimensions have been entered, then the Quick Spec
mode will be activated. In Quick Spec mode only the Angle/Offset data will be
available, no machine moves will be calculated, and if either the thermal growth or
Review Results options have been enabled they will be disabled. In this case, a
warning message displays before continuing. The warning message prompts to
verify that proceeding to Quick Spec mode is desired. If you answer yes, then it
advances to the next step in the procedure. If you answer no, then the operation
aborts and the unit remains at the Enter Dimensions screen.
In addition to the RPM and C and F dimensions, if any of the following dimensions
are missing the Quick Spec mode activates. Refer to the Quick Spec section on
page 3-53 for more information.

• A, B and D m • B, D and E • B and D

• A, B and E • A and D • B and E


• A, D and E • A and E

The A, B, C, D, and E dimensions are required to calculate and view the six alter-
nate machine move solutions that are available in the Move Machine function.

Laser Address Selection 3-47


If only the RPM and A, B, C, and F dimensions have been entered, then no alter-
nate solutions will be available for the right machine. If only the RPM and D, E, C,
and F dimensions have been entered, then no alternate solutions will be available
for the left machine. In either case, no warning message will be displayed before
continuing.
If the A dimension is the only input missing, then no alternate solutions that
include the A dimension will be available. If the E dimension is the only input
missing, then no alternate solutions that include the E dimension will be available.
In either case, a warning message will be displayed before continuing. The warning
message will prompt you to verify that this is a single foot machine. If you answer
yes, then you will advance to the next step in the procedure. If you answer no, then
the operation is aborted and you will remain at the Enter Dimensions screen.
If the B dimension is the only input missing, then no alternate solutions will be avail-
able for the left machine. If the D dimension is the only input missing, then no
alternate solutions will be available for the right machine. In either case, a warning
message will be displayed before continuing. The warning message informs you
that the missing dimension is required to calculate machine moves for the left or
right machine. The message also prompts you to verify that you want to proceed
without the missing dimension. If you answer yes, then you will advance to the next
step in the procedure. If you answer no, then the operation is aborted and you will
remain at the Enter Dimensions screen.

Note
When thermal growth is enabled, all machine dimensions must be
entered before advancing to the thermal growth screens. If not, a
message displays when you try to advance to the next step in the pro-
cedure. If all dimensions have not been entered, thermal growth will
be disabled before advancing.

3-48 Horizontal Alignment


Refer to the following table for a description of each dimension.

Measure
Dimension Measurement Description to the
Nearest

A Center of outboard foot to center of inboard foot of the 1/8 inch


machine on the left. (3 mm)

B Center of inboard foot on the left machine to the laser head 1/8 inch
face on the left machine. To enter a measurement for a foot (3 mm)
that falls inside the laser face, place a negative sign (–) in front
of it.

C Measure from the inside face of one laser head to the inside 1/16 inch
face of the other laser head. (1.5 mm)

D Center of inboard foot on the right machine to the laser head 1/8 inch
on the right machine. To enter a measurement for a foot that (3 mm)
falls inside the laser face, place a negative sign (–) in front of
it.

E Center of outboard foot to center of inboard foot of the 1/8 inch


machine on the right. (3 mm)

F From right laser head to center of coupling or, to the location 1/8 inch
where offset tolerances are measured (this is not required for (3 mm)
jackshaft tolerances). To enter a measurement where the
center of the coupling falls outside or behind a laser face,
place a negative sign (-) in front of the measurement.

Note
The dimensions are the same for both the Model 8215 and the
Model 8225 laser heads.

Note
With large equipment, you may need to drop a plumb bob from the
laser head to measure these dimensions accurately.

Laser Address Selection 3-49


Left and Right Arrow keys
Use the Left and Right Arrow keys to select the field to modify (highlighted with
the red box around it).

Enter key
Use the Enter key to advance to either the Sweep Laser Heads step or the thermal
growth screen(s). If the Thermal Growth option is not enabled once all required
dimensions have been entered, the Enter Dimensions step back on the Main
screen will be marked completed and the unit advances to the Sweep Laser Heads
step. If the Thermal Growth option is enabled, the display advances to the thermal
growth screen(s).

3-50 Horizontal Alignment


Entering Fractions
With the analyzer units set to English, the decimal “.” and forward slash “/” charac-
ters can be used to enter fractional values on numeric entry screens in which these
two characters are available. The decimal “.” character is used to separate the
integer part from the fractional part of the numerical value.

Entering a fractional value of 5 3---


4

Laser Address Selection 3-51


For example, if a fractional value of 5.3/4 is entered (shown in the screen above) it
will be converted to 5.75 (shown in the screen below) when either another dimen-
sion is selected or the Enter key is pressed to accept the screen and advance to the
next step in the procedure.

Factional value of 5 3--- converted to 5.75


4

3-52 Horizontal Alignment


Quick Spec
Quick Spec mode allows you to make a quick check of the alignment condition of
a machine with minimal setup and effort. If a machine is found to have unaccept-
able alignment, the procedure can be readily converted to a full alignment proce-
dure and machine moves calculated. Quick Spec is only available in the Advanced
Laser Align program for horizontal jobs.
Quick Spec mode is activated when only the RPM and C and F dimensions have
been entered. In addition to the RPM and C and F dimensions, if any of the fol-
lowing dimensions are missing, the Quick Spec mode will be activated. Refer to the
Enter Dimensions section on page 3-45 for more information.

• A, B and D m • B, D and E • B and D

• A, B and E • A and D • B and E


• A, D and E • A and E

In this Mode, only tolerance plot information will be available since machine move
information can not be calculated without machine dimensions. For this reason,
the tolerance plot screens will be displayed immediately after data has been
acquired and analyzed. In addition, when the Quick Spec mode is activated, if
either the thermal growth or Review Results options have been enabled they will be
disabled. In this case, a warning message displays before continuing.

Laser Address Selection 3-53


After viewing the tolerance plot(s), use the Enter key to advance to the next step in
the procedure. In the next step, you will be given a choice to consider the align-
ment finished, retake data, align the standard machine, or align the C-face
machine.

Options available at end of Quick Spec job

If Finished is selected, data remains stored and you advance to the Main screen
without checking the Move Machine program step on the Main screen as com-
plete.
If Retake Data is selected, data is cleared and you advance to the first screen of the
Sweep Laser Heads step. In the Quick Spec mode, no more than one set of data
can be stored on the job.
If Align Standard Machine is selected, data remains stored and you advance to the
Enter Dimensions screen where the machine dimensions for at least one of the
machines has to be entered. Once the required dimensions have been entered use
the Enter key to advance to the Move Machine step where the machine moves can
be viewed.

3-54 Horizontal Alignment


If Align C-face Machine is selected, data remains stored and you advance to the C-
face Setup screen where the machine dimensions for the flange location where
moves are to be made can be entered. Once the required dimensions have been
entered use the Enter key to advance to the C-face Solution screen where the align-
ment condition and machine moves can be viewed. Refer to the C-face Alignment
section on page 3-175 for more information.

Note
To perform a C-face alignment, the tolerance type can only be Stan-
dard. If the job has a tolerance type of Jackshaft defined, when you
select the Align C-face Machine option a message will be displayed. If
you answer yes, then the tolerance type will be changed to Standard
and you will proceed to the C-face Setup screen. If you answer no,
then the operation is aborted.

Laser Address Selection 3-55


Entering Thermal Growth Information
Thermal growth can cause a machine alignment to change significantly as
machines are started from a “cold” position and run up to operating speed (“hot”
position). The Thermal Growth screens allow you to enter the amount of thermal
growth both machines experience during operation. The Thermal Growth
screens are reached by pressing the Enter key on the Enter Dimensions screen (if
thermal growth is enabled on the Alt Main screen). Refer to the Job Flow section
on page 3-42 for more information about enabling the Thermal Growth option.
This option is not available when Quick Spec mode is activated. Refer to the Quick
Spec section on page 3-53 for more information.
Refer to the Alignment Application Notes section on page A-3 for more informa-
tion about thermal growth.

Note
The larger PSD on the Model 8225 is capable of handling larger
amounts of thermal growth than the smaller PSD on the Model 8215.

The Laser Align program allows you to input the amount of thermal growth at the
machine feet, or at the machine profile positions (which are then converted to the
corresponding movement at the machine feet). It also consists of the following
three methods of converting from target thermal growth alignment numbers (usu-
ally provided by the Equipment Manufacturer) to estimated machine thermal
growth movements at each foot:
• Gap/Offset
• Face/Rim
• Reverse Dial

Note
The information entered for these conversion methods is only stored
with the job as long as it resides in the analyzer. When one of these
jobs is reloaded into the analyzer from the PC only the vertical and
horizontal thermal growth calculated at each machine foot is stored
and recalled with the job when it is activated. In this case, the Thermal
Growth method defined for the job is set to Growth at Feet.

3-56 Horizontal Alignment


Growth at Feet
If Thermal Growth at Feet has been defined as the thermal growth method for the
job, you are able to input the amount of vertical and horizontal thermal growth at
each machine foot.

Enter Growth at Feet

Growth in the vertical direction is displayed in the upper section of the screen while
growth in the horizontal direction is displayed in the lower section of the screen.
The amount of vertical thermal growth that both machines will experience during
operation can be expressed in either mils or millimeters (mm), depending on the
analyzer units. Thermal growth values should correspond to the amount each shaft
moves in the vertical and horizontal directions directly above each foot. If thermal
growth is negligible, either leave it blank or enter zeroes. At least one non-zero value
must be entered before continuing. The range of values that can be entered for the
vertical direction are -250 to 250 mils or -6.35 to 6.35 mm. The range of values that
can be entered for the horizontal direction are -250 to 250 mils or -6.35 to 6.35 mm.

Laser Address Selection 3-57


Note
If one or both machines actually experience a downward growth
during operation, then negative numbers should be used for the ver-
tical direction. If one or both machines experience a growth to the
right during operation, then negative numbers should be used for
the horizontal direction.

Up, Down, Left, and Right Arrow keys


Use the Up, Down, Left, and Right Arrow keys to select the field you want to modify
(highlighted with the red box around it).

Enter key
Use the Enter key to advance to either the Foot Pre-Check screens or the data
acquisition screens. Once all required dimensions have been entered, the Enter
Dimensions step back on the Main screen will be marked completed and you will
advance to the next step in the procedure.

3-58 Horizontal Alignment


Growth at Profile
If Thermal Growth at Profile has been defined as the thermal growth method for
the job, you are able to input the amount of vertical and horizontal thermal growth
at a location other than at each machine foot. The program uses this information
to calculate the vertical and horizontal thermal growth at each machine foot. This
method consists of the following three screens.

Enter Profile Dimensions

The Enter Profile Dimensions screen, allows you to enter the dimensions for the
profile locations and their relationship with respect to the machine feet locations as
defined in the Enter Dimensions screen. Profile P1 (far right of the screen) is
located with respect to the machine configuration as defined for the job. The loca-
tion of each profile is displayed as a reference only.
Dimensions can be expressed in either inches or millimeters (mm), depending on
the analyzer units. All dimensions must be entered before continuing. The range
of values that can be entered for the I dimension are -3600 to 3600 inches or
-91440 to 91440 mm. The range of values that can be entered for the J, K, and L
dimensions are 0.01 to 3600 inches or 0.254 to 91440 mm.

Laser Address Selection 3-59


Note
Dimension I is negative, if the location of profile P4 is closer to the
coupling than the outboard feet of the left machine.

When entering any of the machine dimensions, they should be measured and
extended to the nearest 1/8 inch (3 mm). Refer to the Entering Fractions section
on page 3-51 for information about entering fractions.
Refer to the following table for a description of each dimension.

Measure
Dimension Measurement Description to the
Nearest

I Profile P4 to the center of outboard foot of the machine on 1/8 inch


the left. (3 mm)

J Profile P4 to profile P3. 1/8 inch


(3 mm)

K Profile P3 across the coupling to profile P2. 1/8 inch


(3 mm)

L Profile P2 to profile P1. 1/8 inch


(3 mm)

Left and Right Arrow keys


Use the Left and Right Arrow keys to select the field you want to modify (high-
lighted with the red box around it).

3-60 Horizontal Alignment


Enter key
Use the Enter key to advance to the Enter Growth at Profile screen.

Enter Growth at Profile

The Enter Growth at Profile screen, allows entry of the amount of vertical and hor-
izontal thermal growth at a location other than at each machine foot. Growth in the
vertical direction displays in the upper section of the screen, while growth in the
horizontal direction displays in the lower section of the screen.
The amount of thermal growth that both machines experience during operation
can be expressed in either mils or millimeters (mm), depending on the analyzer
units. Thermal growth values should correspond to the amount each shaft moves
in the vertical and horizontal directions at each profile location. If thermal growth
is negligible, leave it blank or enter zeroes. At least one non-zero value must be
entered before continuing. The range of values that can be entered for the vertical
direction are -250 to 250 mils or -6.35 to 6.35 mm. The range of values that can be
entered for the horizontal direction are -250 to 250 mils or -6.35 to 6.35 mm.

Laser Address Selection 3-61


Note
If one or both machines actually experience a downward growth
during operation, then negative numbers should be used for the ver-
tical direction. If one or both machines experience a growth to the
right during operation, then negative numbers should be used for
the horizontal direction.

Up, Down, Left, and Right Arrow keys


Use the Up, Down, Left, and Right Arrow keys to select the field you want to modify
(highlighted with the red box around it).

Enter key
Use the Enter key to advance to the Growth at Feet screen.

Growth at Feet

3-62 Horizontal Alignment


The Growth at Feet screen displays the calculated vertical and horizontal thermal
growth at each machine foot. Growth in the vertical direction is displayed in the
upper section of the screen while growth in the horizontal direction is displayed in
the lower section of the screen.
The amount of thermal growth that both machines will experience during opera-
tion can be expressed in either mils or millimeters (mm), depending on the ana-
lyzer units. Thermal growth values correspond to the amount each shaft moves in
the vertical and horizontal directions directly above each foot.

Note
If one or both machines actually experience a downward growth
during operation, then negative numbers are used for the vertical
direction. If one or both machines experience a growth to the right
during operation, then negative numbers are used for the horizontal
direction.

Edit Growth Values key


Use the Edit Growth Values key to edit the growth values.

Enter key
Use the Enter key to advance to either the Foot Pre-Check screens or the data
acquisition screens. Once all required dimensions have been entered, the Enter
Dimensions step back on the Main screen will be marked completed and you will
advance to the next step in the procedure.

Laser Address Selection 3-63


Gap/Offset
If Gap/Offset has been defined as the thermal growth method for the job, you are
able to input the vertical and horizontal thermal growth using the target gap and
offset readings at the coupling. This is probably the most the commonly used con-
version method of specifying thermal growth targets. The program then uses this
information to calculate the vertical and horizontal thermal growth at each
machine foot. This method consists of the following three screens.

Enter Gap/Offset Dimensions

The Enter Gap/Offset Dimensions screen, allows you to enter the dimensions for
the coupling and its relationship with respect to the machine feet locations as
defined in the Enter Dimensions screen.
Dimensions can be expressed in either inches or millimeters (mm), depending on
the analyzer units. All dimensions must be entered before continuing. The range
of values that can be entered for the U dimension are 0.01 to 3600 inches or 0.254
to 91440 mm. The range of values that can be entered for the V dimension are
-3600 to 3600 inches or -91440 to 91440 mm.

3-64 Horizontal Alignment


When entering any of the machine dimensions, they should be measured and
extended to the nearest 1/8 inch (3 mm). Refer to the Entering Fractions section
on page 3-51 for information about entering fractions.
Refer to the following table for a description of each dimension.

Measure
Dimension Measurement Description to the
Nearest

U Diameter of the coupling. This is also, the circumference of 1/8 inch


the coupling divided by 3.14 (pi). (3 mm)

V Center of inboard foot on the left machine to the sensor 1/8 inch
location on the coupling. This is usually the center of the (3 mm)
coupling.

Left and Right Arrow keys


Use the Left and Right Arrow keys to select the field you want to modify (high-
lighted with the red box around it).

Laser Address Selection 3-65


Enter key
Use the Enter key to advance to the Enter Gap/Offset Target screen.

Enter Gap/Offset Target

The Enter Gap/Offset Target screen, allows you to enter the gap and offset
thermal growth target numbers at the coupling.
Growth in the vertical direction is displayed in the upper section of the screen while
growth in the horizontal direction is displayed in the lower section of the screen.
The amount of thermal growth that both machines will experience during opera-
tion can be expressed in either mils or millimeters (mm), depending on the ana-
lyzer units. If thermal growth is negligible, either leave it blank or enter zeroes. At
least one non-zero value must be entered before continuing. The range of values
that can be entered for both the gap and offset are 0 to 2048 mils or 0 to 52.02 mm.
Gap is the difference in the coupling halves at the top and at the bottom at the spec-
ified diameter. If the number is greater at the top, the gap is considered to be
“open” on the top. If the number is greater at the bottom, the gap is considered to
be “open” on the bottom.

3-66 Horizontal Alignment


Offset is the difference in the coupling halves at the top. For this parameter, either
the coupling of the left machine is higher than the right machine or the coupling
of the right machine is higher than the left machine.

Set Gap and Set Offset keys


Use the Set Gap and Set Offset keys to enter the gap and offset thermal growth for
the corresponding direction.

Set Direction keys


Use the Set Direction keys to define whether the coupling gap is open at the top or
bottom and to set whether the coupling offset of the left machine is higher than the
right machine or the coupling offset of the right machine is higher than the left
machine for the corresponding direction.

Enter key
Use the Enter key to advance to the Growth at Feet screen.
The Growth at Feet screen displays the calculated vertical and horizontal thermal
growth at each machine foot. Refer to the Growth at Profile section on page 3-59
for more information.

Laser Address Selection 3-67


Face/Rim
If Face/Rim has been defined as the thermal growth method for the job, you are
able to input the amount of vertical and horizontal thermal growth using target
face and rim dial indicator readings. This is probably the second-most commonly
used, conversion method of specifying thermal growth targets. The program will
then use this information to calculate the vertical and horizontal thermal growth at
each machine foot. This method consists of the following three screens.

Enter Face/Rim Dimensions

The Enter Face/Rim Dimensions screen, allows you to enter the dimensions for
the coupling and its relationship with respect to the machine feet locations as
defined in the Enter Dimensions screen.
Dimensions can be expressed in either inches or millimeters (mm), depending on
the analyzer units. All dimensions must be entered before continuing. The range
of values that can be entered for the U dimension are 0.01 to 3600 inches or 0.254
to 91440 mm. The range of values that can be entered for the V dimension are
-3600 to 3600 inches or -91440 to 91440 mm.

3-68 Horizontal Alignment


When entering any of the machine dimensions, they should be measured and
extended to the nearest 1/8 inch (3 mm). Refer to the Entering Fractions section
on page 3-51 for information about entering fractions.
Refer to the following table for a description of each dimension.

Measure
Dimension Measurement Description to the
Nearest

Diameter of the coupling. This is also, the circumference of the 1/8 inch
U
coupling divided by 3.14 (pi). (3 mm)

Center of inboard foot on the left machine to the sensor location 1/8 inch
V
on the coupling. This is usually the center of the coupling. (3 mm)

Left and Right Arrow keys


Use the Left and Right Arrow keys to select the field you want to modify (high-
lighted with the red box around it).

Enter Face/Rim Dimensions (measurement location)

Laser Address Selection 3-69


Change Sensor Location key
Use the Change Sensor Location key, when the coupling is selected (highlighted
with the red box around it), to change the side of the coupling on which the target
dial indicator readings are to be taken. The sensor location determines the direc-
tion (sign) of the Rim TIR (Total Indicator Runout). For example, if the left
machine was to be set 3 mils high, then if the sensor location was specified to be on
the left machine shaft and the top target reading was 0.0, the bottom reading would
be -6.0 mils. With the same conditions and the sensor specified to be on the right
machine shaft, the bottom reading would be +6.0 mils.

Enter key
Use the Enter key to advance to the Enter Face/Rim Target screen.

Enter Face/Rim Target

The Enter Face/Rim Target screen, allows you to enter the target face and rim dial
indicator readings.

3-70 Horizontal Alignment


The target face and rim dial indicator readings can be expressed in either mils or
millimeters (mm), depending on the analyzer units. All values must be entered
before continuing. The range of values that can be entered for both the face and
rim readings are -2048 to 2048 mils or -52.02 to 52.02 mm.

Left and Right Arrow keys


Use the Left and Right Arrow keys to select the field you want to modify (high-
lighted with the red box around it).

Enter key
Use the Enter key to advance to the Growth at Feet screen.
The Growth at Feet screen displays the calculated vertical and horizontal thermal
growth at each machine foot. Refer to the Growth at Profile section on page 3-59
for more information.

Laser Address Selection 3-71


Reverse Dial
If Reverse Dial has been defined as the thermal growth method for the job, you are
able to input the amount of vertical and horizontal thermal growth using target
reverse dial indicator readings. The program will then use this information to cal-
culate the vertical and horizontal thermal growth at each machine foot. This
method consists of the following three screens.

Enter Reverse Dial Dimensions

The Enter Reverse Dial Dimensions screen, allows you to enter the dimensions for
the sensor locations and their relationship with respect to the machine feet loca-
tions as defined in the Enter Dimensions screen.
Dimensions can be expressed in either inches or millimeters (mm), depending on
the analyzer units. All dimensions must be entered before continuing. The range
of values that can be entered for the M dimension are -3600 to 3600 inches or
-91440 to 91440 mm. The range of values that can be entered for the N dimension
are 0.01 to 3600 inches or 0.254 to 91440 mm.

3-72 Horizontal Alignment


When entering any of the machine dimensions, they should be measured and
extended to the nearest 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). Refer to the Entering Fractions sec-
tion on page 3-51 for information about entering fractions.
Refer to the following table for a description of each dimension.

Measure
Dimension Measurement Description to the
Nearest

Center of inboard foot on the left machine to the sensor location 1/16 inch
M
on the left machine shaft. (1.5 mm)

Sensor location on the left machine shaft across the coupling to 1/16 inch
N
the sensor location on the right machine shaft. (1.5 mm)

Left and Right Arrow keys


Use the Left and Right Arrow keys to select the field you want to modify (high-
lighted with the red box around it).

Laser Address Selection 3-73


Enter key
Use the Enter key to advance to the Enter Reverse Dial Target screen.

Enter Reverse Dial Target

The Enter Reverse Dial Target screen, allows you to enter the target reverse dial
indicator readings.
The target reverse dial indicator readings can be expressed in either mils or milli-
meters (mm), depending on the analyzer units. All values must be entered before
continuing. The range of values that can be entered for any of the dial indicator
readings is -2048 to 2048 mils, or -52.02 to 52.02 mm.

Left and Right Arrow keys


Use the Left and Right Arrow keys to select the field you want to modify (high-
lighted with the red box around it).

Enter key
Use the Enter key to advance to the Growth at Feet screen.

3-74 Horizontal Alignment


The Growth at Feet screen displays the calculated vertical and horizontal thermal
growth at each machine foot. Refer to the Growth at Profile section on page 3-59
for more information.

Sweep Laser Heads


Once all required machine dimensions have been entered, you are automatically
advanced to the Sweep Laser Heads step. From the Main screen, the Sweep Laser
Heads screens are reached by pressing the Sweep Laser Heads key. If the Foot Pre-
Check option is not enabled, you will advance to the data acquisition screens. If the
Foot Pre-Check option is enabled, you will advance to the Foot Pre-Check screens.

Main screen after entering required dimensions

From the Sweep Laser Heads step, you can acquire the data using the alignment
method defined for the job and if desired, you can perform a Soft Foot or FDI
check. Refer to the Acquiring Alignment Data section on page 3-82 for more infor-
mation about acquiring alignment data. Refer to the Foot Pre-Check section on
page 3-76 for more information about performing a Foot Pre-Check.

Laser Address Selection 3-75


Foot Pre-Check
The Foot Pre-Check option allows you to check the soft foot condition of the
machine being aligned. Refer to “Machinery Shaft Alignment — General Overview”
on page A-1 for more information.
If this option is enabled for this job, the Foot Pre-Check screens will be automati-
cally displayed only once as you advance through the procedure. After you com-
plete or skip this option it will not be automatically displayed again. However, you
can perform or access this option any time during the procedure from the data
acquisition screens. Refer to the Acquiring Alignment Data section on page 3-82
for more information.

Positioning heads for a Foot Pre-Check

The type of Foot Pre-Check selected for the job determines the first Foot Pre-Check
screen displayed. From this screen (independent of the type selected) you are
prompted to verify that all hold-down bolts are tight and position the laser heads at
the starting angle. Ensure that the laser heads are at the top position (0°), or at the
bottom position (180°).

3-76 Horizontal Alignment


Note
Both laser heads need to be turned on for this option to function
properly.

In the upper section of the screen you will find 8 machine feet positions displayed
graphically around the machine.

Up and Down Arrow keys


Use the Up and Down Arrow keys to select the foot to be checked (highlighted with
the red box around it). In the screen above, the right outboard foot of the left
machine has been selected.

Enter key
Use the Enter key to complete (end) the Foot Pre-Check and advance to the data
acquisition screen. Once this option has been completed, it will not be automati-
cally displayed if the Sweep Laser Heads step is re-entered.

Note
Emerson recommends that you always check all feet before acquiring
alignment data.

The current laser head position (represented by a hash mark on the outer most
part of the circle) is displayed graphically at the bottom of the screen. The average
angle reading will be displayed within the circle. The background of the circle will
be white if the laser heads are not within 2° of each other and 3° of 0° or 180°. The
background of the circle will be green if the laser heads are within 2° of each other
and 3° of 0° or 180°.

Laser Address Selection 3-77


Foot Pre-Check Function Keys (prior to starting the Foot Pre-Check)

Start
Use the Start key to start the foot pre-check once you have verified that all hold-
down bolts are tight and positioned the laser heads.

Clear All
Use the Clear All key to clear all acquired data on all feet if data has been acquired
and stored on any foot. Before any data is cleared, a warning message will be dis-
played asking you if this is truly the operation to be performed. If you answer yes,
then the data stored on all of the feet will be cleared. If you answer no the operation
is aborted.

Skip
Use the Skip key to skip the Foot Pre-Check and advance to the data acquisition
screen. Once this option is skipped, it will not be automatically displayed if the
Sweep Laser Heads step is re-entered. The Enter key can be used to do the same.

Set Soft Foot


Use the Set Soft Foot key to change the Foot Pre-Check type to Soft Foot.

Set FDI
Use the Set FDI key to change the Foot Pre-Check type to FDI.

3-78 Horizontal Alignment


Check Lasers
Use the Check Lasers key to check the operational status of the heads. Refer to the
Check Lasers section on page 3-30 for more information.

Performing a Foot Pre-Check

Once the Foot Pre-Check starts, a prompt displays as notification to loosen the hold-
down bolt for the selected foot and wait for the data to stabilize. The arrow displays
within the circle at the bottom of the screen and assists in determining data stability.
When data is unstable, the arrow turns (rotates). When data is stable, the arrow
stops turning.
Once the arrow stops turning, accept the reading and either select another foot or
advance beyond the Foot Pre-Check. After accepting a reading, it is evaluated based
on the type of Foot Pre-Check being used.

Caution!
Be sure to retighten the bolt after you have accepted the reading for that foot before
starting another check or acquiring any alignment data.

Laser Address Selection 3-79


Soft Foot
The Soft Foot calculation is equal to ((the magnitude of the movement of the foot)
divided by (dimension C — Bracket to Sensor distance)) divided by the Soft Foot
Tolerance. The default Soft Foot Tolerance = 0.5 mils / inch. If Soft Foot has been
defined for the job, the data is evaluated as follows:
• OK
The measurement for Soft Foot is within the specified tolerance.
• X
The measurement is from 1 to 2 times the specified tolerance
(1x tolerance < measurement < 2x tolerance).
• XX
The measurement is from 2 to 3 times the specified tolerance
(2x tolerance < measurement < 3x tolerance).
• XXX
The measurement is greater than 3x tolerance.
This method does not display a number as the machine is being checked for soft
foot (to prevent you from mistaking this number for a shim correction).

Frame Distortion Index (FDI)


The FDI calculation is equal to ((the magnitude of the movement of the foot)
divided by (dimension C — Bracket to Sensor distance)) multiplied by two times the
foot to foot distance. If FDI has been defined for the job, the data is evaluated as fol-
lows:
• “No Box”
The measurement condition is excellent (less than 2.0).
• “Clear Box”
The measurement condition is acceptable (between 2.0 and 3.0).
• “Dark Box”
The measurement condition is out of tolerance (greater than 3.0).

3-80 Horizontal Alignment


Note
Both the Soft Foot and FDI tolerance values can be changed in
UltraMgr and transferred to the Advanced Laser Align program.

Warning!
The numbers displayed are not the required correction shims for this
foot. Soft Foot and FDI corrections frequently require wedge shaped
arrangements of shims to be installed. However, the actual thickness
and shape of the Soft Foot and FDI correction must be determined
by using a feeler gauge.

Enter key
Use the Enter key to accept and store the reading for the active foot. The Accept
key can be used to do the same.

Laser Address Selection 3-81


Foot Pre-Check Function Keys (after the Foot Pre-Check has been
started)

Accept
Use the Accept key to accept and store the reading for the active foot. The Enter
key can be used to do the same.

Check Lasers
Use the Check Lasers key to check the operational status of the heads. Refer to the
Check Lasers section on page 3-30 for more information.

Acquiring Alignment Data


To provide data acquisition for varying applications, circumstances, and prefer-
ences, a number of different data collection methods are provided. Therefore, data
acquisition screens vary depending on the alignment method defined for the job.
The method to be used is defined on the Alt Main screen. These methods include:
• Auto Sweep
Data is automatically acquired while the shaft is rotated. The arc of rotation can vary
from as little as 45° to a full 360° (one revolution). This method is especially useful
when the 4 point measurement technique is impractical or when inconsistencies in
shaft position exist at points in the rotation. Averaging mode allows many revolu-
tions. Refer to the Auto Sweep section on page 3-85 for more information.
• Manual Sweep
Data is measured each time the laser heads are in alignment and the number
keypad is pressed. Data from up to 180 positions may be recorded. This method is
especially useful for performing uncoupled or non-rotational alignments or when
too much background vibration is present. This method functions similarly to the
Auto Sweep mode except that the laser heads, or shafts, are stopped at each posi-
tion where data is to be taken and a key pressed to store a reading. Refer to the
Manual Sweep section on page 3-94 for more information.
• Auto 4 Point

3-82 Horizontal Alignment


The four point automatic mode is a more traditional style of acquiring data for
alignment. The laser heads are mounted on a shaft, and the shaft is then rotated so
that data can be taken when the laser heads are at the 12 o’clock (0 or 360°), 3
o’clock (90°), 6 o’clock (180°), and 9 o’clock (270°) positions. The readings are
continuously averaged whenever the laser heads are at one of these positions and
automatically recorded when the shaft is rotated to the next position. The aver-
aging process reduces variation from jitter due to background vibration or from
slight changes in the angular position of the heads. Refer to the Auto 4 Point sec-
tion on page 3-100 for more information.
• Manual 4 Point
Similar to the Auto 4 Point mode except that the user has complete control over
when data is acquired and which of the four measurement positions it will be used
in. This method is useful when the machinery is not mounted in a true horizontal
orientation, so that the inclinometer is not effective or when the clock positions rel-
ative to vertical and horizontal base movements of the machine are nonstandard.
Refer to the Manual 4 Point section on page 3-105 for more information.
• Dual Pass
Functions similar to the Auto Sweep mode except data is automatically acquired as
each laser head passes by each other. This method, like Manual Sweep, is useful for
performing uncoupled or non-rotational alignments. Refer to the Dual Pass sec-
tion on page 3-119 for more information.

4 Point Methods - General Information


There are two fundamental methods by which the data is acquired for shaft align-
ment calculations: the 4 point modes and the sweep modes. The 4 point modes
require data to be taken at positions perpendicular and parallel to the axis in which
the machine's horizontal position can be adjusted. This is sometimes called the
clock method and most often uses data readings at 12 o'clock (0 or 360°), at 3
o'clock (90°), at 6 o'clock (180°), and at 9 o'clock (270°). This is typical of the data
acquired by those trained in using a scaled graph to manually arrive at an align-
ment solution using the reverse dial indicator method.

Laser Address Selection 3-83


When using the 4 point methods, ideally, the sum of the two horizontal measure-
ments will equal the sum of the two vertical measurements. This relationship may
be used to check the data for validity. Any variance greater then 10-20% is a cause
for concern. When this occurs, repeat the readings to verify that a variation wasn't
accidentally introduced by the user. For example, using the fixtures as levers to turn
the shaft or not controlling the torsional play in the coupling as the shaft is turned.
Damaged regions in rolling element bearings and shaft rubs could also cause prob-
lems, but are less common.
Because of this mathematical relationship, having any 3 of the 4 points allows the
fourth point to be calculated. This can be useful when obstructions only allow you
to rotate the laser fixtures to three of the four clock positions. Unfortunately, esti-
mating the fourth point like this removes the ability to check the validity of the data.
Abnormal readings at any one of the three known points could cause error. There-
fore, use this technique with caution and only when absolutely necessary. Emerson
recommends using a partial sweep method rather than the three 90° clock points
if the arc of rotation is restricted.

Sweep Methods - General Information


The sweep modes use data acquired at several different angular positions. By using
Emerson’s patented process, this data is translated into readings for the four clock
positions. There are several advantages to the sweep method over the 4 point
method of acquiring data. Data does not have to be acquired at 3 or 4 specific
angular locations; any angular positions will work. More data points are used to
arrive at the true rotational behavior of the shaft; therefore, a discrepancy in one
area of the rotation does not have as great an effect. If a full rotation of the shaft is
not possible, the three point method still requires at least 180° of shaft rotation,
which must begin at one of the four designated positions; the sweep method can
use rotations less than 90° starting from any position. However, keep in mind that
no matter what method is used, reconstructing a complete picture using partial
data is never as desirable as starting with a complete picture.

3-84 Horizontal Alignment


Auto Sweep
If Auto Sweep has been defined as the laser alignment method for the job, the laser
heads automatically acquire data using their built-in inclinometers while the shaft
is rotated. The arc of rotation can vary from as little as 45° to a full 360° (one revo-
lution). This method is especially useful when the 4 point measurement technique
is impractical or when inconsistencies in shaft position exist at points in the rota-
tion.

Note
Both laser heads need to be turned on for this option to function
properly.

With the Auto sweep method, data readings or values are automatically acquired
and stored in the laser heads every 2°; therefore, in a 360° sweep, it is possible to
acquire up to 180 data readings per laser head.
When setting the job up to use Auto Sweep as the Laser Align Method for acquiring
data, you must also select the acquisition mode to be either Standard or Averaging.

Laser Address Selection 3-85


Standard Mode
This mode of operation (sometimes referred to as the Unidirectional Mode) is the
mode that is most often used during Auto Sweep alignments. In this mode, a direc-
tion of rotation is automatically defined for data acquisition based on the first rota-
tion to progress past the starting point by 20°. In the Standard mode, data acquired
in the data acquisition’s direction of rotation always overwrites any previous data
stored at the same angular position. This includes data acquired at its defined angle
position. In this mode of operation, once the direction of rotation is defined by the
laser heads, only the data in that direction of rotation will be acquired; therefore,
any backward rotation of the shaft due to backlash will not be acquired and thus will
not affect the alignment results. The following scenario illustrates this more clearly.
1. When the analyzer initializes the laser heads, all data is cleared and their
current position is defined as the starting point for determination of the data
collection direction.
2. If the laser heads are rotated less than 20° in the counterclockwise position
from the defined starting point, data is collected for this rotation but it is not
committed and permanently stored.
3. If the counter-clockwise rotation is stopped before the 20° rotation and the
laser heads are now rotated in the clockwise direction, data will be ignored
(not acquired) until the starting point is reached again. At this point all data
collected in the counter-clockwise direction is cleared and the data
acquisition is started in the clockwise direction.
4. This mode of operation will continue as long as the laser heads are rotated
in either the clockwise or counter-clockwise directions until a rotation of
more than 20° occurs in one of the directions of rotation. Once the 20° point
is passed, all acquired data is committed and stored and the direction of
rotation is defined as the data acquisition’s direction of rotation.
5. Now data will only be acquired when the laser heads are rotated in the same
direction as the defined data acquisition’s direction of rotation.

3-86 Horizontal Alignment


Averaging Mode
This mode of operation is intended to allow multiple sampling of data in order to
reduce the noise in the data by averaging all of the acquired values. In the Aver-
aging Mode, a direction of rotation for the data acquisition is defined in the same
manner as it is in the Standard mode. However, instead of always over-writing the
last data reading stored at the same angular position, the new readings will be aver-
aged with the previous readings if the laser head has been moved at least 20° in the
reverse direction or a full 360° sweep is performed. In this mode of operation, once
the direction of rotation is defined by the laser heads, only the data in that direction
of rotation will be acquired; therefore, any backward rotation of the shaft due to
backlash will not be acquired and thus will not affect the alignment results. The fol-
lowing scenario will clarify the intended operation.
1. Assume that the data acquisition’s direction of rotation is defined as
clockwise (see scenario for Standard Mode).
2. If the laser heads are rotated in the clockwise direction to an angle of 50°,
data is acquired and stored for each angular position in this rotation.
3. If the laser heads are then rotated in the counter-clockwise direction for 10°
(back to an angle of 40°), all data acquired is ignored in the counter-
clockwise direction since the direction of rotation is not in the data
acquisition’s direction of rotation.
4. If the laser heads are again rotated in the clockwise direction for 25° (to an
angle of 65°), the data acquired for each angular position will over-write the
previous data acquired because the angle of negative rotation was not at least
20°.
5. If the laser heads are then rotated in the counter-clockwise direction for 30°
(back to an angle of 35°), all data is ignored because of the direction of
rotation.
6. Now if the laser heads are rotated in the clockwise direction for 360° - the
data for the angular positions in the range 36°to 65° will be averaged with the
previous values since there has been a rotation of at least 20° away from the
stopping point. The data for the angular positions in the range 66° to 359°
will receive a data value since the direction of rotation is correct. The data
angular positions in the range 0° to 35° will be averaged with the previous
values since the rotation in the clockwise direction passed the starting point
(i.e. 360° sweep).

Laser Address Selection 3-87


There are four basic steps when acquiring alignment data using Auto Sweep.
1. Turn on and position the laser heads at the starting angle.
2. Using the Laser Align program, initialize the laser heads.
3. With the 2130 analyzer set aside, sweep the laser heads.
4. Using the Laser Align program, get the acquired data from the laser heads.

3-88 Horizontal Alignment


Positioning heads for Auto Sweep

The first data acquisition screen for Auto Sweep, prompts you to turn on and posi-
tion the laser heads at the starting angle.
For this method, the position of the laser heads can be at any angular position you
desire to start from. It is not required to define a sweep arc range and direction of
rotation due to the increased number of data readings acquired every 2° and the
process, which automatically defines the direction of rotation.
The current laser head position (represented by a hash mark on the outer most
part of the circle) is displayed graphically at the bottom of the screen. The average
angle reading will be displayed within the circle. The background of the circle will
be white if the laser heads are not within 2° of each other and green when the laser
heads are within 2° of each other.

Initialize Lasers key


Use the Initialize Lasers key to initialize the laser heads and advance to the next step
in the procedure. The Enter key can be used to do the same.

Laser Address Selection 3-89


Foot Pre-Check key
Use the Foot Pre-Check key to perform a Soft Foot or FDI check. Refer to the Foot
Pre-Check section on page 3-76 for more information about performing a Foot
Pre-Check.

Check Lasers key


Use the Check Lasers key on the Alt screen to check the operational status of the
heads. Refer to the Check Lasers section on page 3-30 for more information.

Review Results key


Use the Review Results key on the Alt screen to return to the Review Measurements
screen where you can continue reviewing and averaging together the results from
multiple acquisitions. This key is available only when the Review Results option is
enabled on the Alt Main screen and the Review Measurements screen has been
exited before the averaged reading set was saved. Refer to the Review Results sec-
tion on page 3-121 for more information.

3-90 Horizontal Alignment


Note
A maximum of 20 reading sets (moves) can be stored on an align-
ment job. If more than 20 reading sets are acquired a message is dis-
played giving you the option of either discard the last reading set
taken or overwriting the 20th reading set with the last reading.

Acquiring data using Auto Sweep

Once the laser heads have been initialized, the next screen prompts you to acquire
the data by rotating the laser heads.

Get Data from Lasers key


Use the Get Data from Lasers key, after the laser heads have been rotated, to
transmit or transfer the data from the laser heads to the analyzer and and to be
advanced to the next step in the procedure. The Enter key can be used to do the
same.

Laser Address Selection 3-91


Note
For the Auto Sweep and Dual Pass methods, if the laser heads have
not yet been initialized and they have not been turned off since they
last acquired the last set of data, the data stored in the heads can be
transferred to the analyzer without having to re-sweep the laser heads.
This is done using the Resend Data option on Alt Laser Configura-
tion screen. This is useful if for some reason the data transfer from the
heads to the analyzer was aborted before it was complete.

Note
For the greatest accuracy and repeatability, all readings should be
acquired using the same direction of rotation. In addition, it is best to
rotate the laser heads in the direction in which the machine rotates
when turning.

The 8215/8225 laser fixtures are designed to be rotated a full revolution in two sec-
onds. As with any sweep, a smooth, uniform acceleration and deceleration during
the rotation of the laser heads is necessary for accurate, reliable, and repeatable
data.

3-92 Horizontal Alignment


Note
To prevent damage to the laser heads, make sure the antennas do not
come into contact with obstacles (e.g. the ground or base plate) as
they are being rotated.

Getting data from heads

During the data transfer, the previous screen shows the progress of the data transfer
for each laser head. When the data transfer is complete, the data is analyzed and a
sine wave is curve fit to the data.
If the fit is satisfactory (85% and above), the program will mark the Sweep Laser
Heads step back on the Main screen completed and advance you to the next step
in the procedure. In addition to marking the Sweep Laser Heads step complete,
the number of moves displayed in the upper section of the main screen is updated.

Laser Address Selection 3-93


If the fit is unsatisfactory (less than 85%) a warning message will be displayed to
inform you that the data is “Unfit”. At this point you should either repeat the data
acquisition or try to manually condition or edit the data using the edit data func-
tion. This built-in check helps alert you to the data losing reliability in the misalign-
ment calculations. Refer to the Display Sine Fit section on page 3-168 for more
information.

Note
Remember, when shaft movement due to causes other than misalign-
ment is present in the data this will appear as randomness (noise) in
the data. This is not normally a problem when the misalignment is
great, but will increasingly interfere as the misalignment decreases.
Therefore, the better the alignment the more likely the chance will
be of getting an unfit data warning.

If you do encounter a machine where this becomes a problem too great to over-
come (for example an unfit sine curve or the presence of too much background
vibration), consider switching to an alternative method such as Manual Sweep or
Auto 4 Point. Refer to the Sweep Mode Curve Data section on page 3-126 and Data
Quality section on page 3-127 for more information.

Manual Sweep
If Manual Sweep has been defined as the laser alignment method for the job, the
laser head’s built-in inclinometers are used while the shaft is rotated, but data is
manually acquired and stored in the Laser Align program instead of in the laser
heads.
Manual Sweep functions similar to Auto Sweep except the laser heads, or shafts, are
stopped at each position data is to be manually taken. Data (or samples as the Laser
Align program refers to them) from up to 180 positions may be recorded. The arc
of rotation can vary from as little as 45° to a full 360° (one revolution). The Manual
Sweep mode is especially useful for performing uncoupled or non-rotational align-
ments or when too much background vibration is present. This is the recom-
mended sweep method for sweeps that are less than 75°.

3-94 Horizontal Alignment


Note
Both laser heads need to be turned on for this option to function
properly.

When setting the job up to use Manual Sweep as the Laser Align Method for
acquiring data, you must also select the acquisition mode to be either Standard or
Averaging and set the sample rate. The sample rate determines the number of data
samples that are to be collected and averaged together to produce a single Laser
PSD reading.

Standard Mode
This mode of operation is the mode that is most often used during Manual Sweep
alignments. In the Standard mode, data acquired in the data acquisition’s direction
of rotation will always overwrite any previous data stored at the same angular posi-
tion.

Laser Address Selection 3-95


Averaging Mode
The Averaging mode of operation is intended to allow multiple sampling of data
in order to reduce the noise in the data by averaging all of the acquired values. In
this mode of operation, the last 20 readings are averaged.

Starting Manual Sweep

On the data acquisition screen for Manual Sweep, the current laser reading (in mils
or mm, depending on the analyzer units) for each laser head is displayed in reverse
video just below the corresponding machine. The current laser head positions
(represented by a hash mark on the outer most part of the circles) are displayed
graphically at the bottom of the screen. The angle reading will be displayed within
the circle. The background of the circles will be white if the laser heads are not
within 2° of each other and green when the laser heads are within 2° of each other.

3-96 Horizontal Alignment


Accept Readings key
Use the Accept Readings key, when the laser head positions and data are as desired,
to store the data. The number of samples, displayed in the center of the screen, will
increment by one (180 max). Each time a data point is stored and the laser heads
are rotated to a new position, a thinner line is left behind to denote where data was
acquired.

Note
A minimum of 3 data points over a 45°sweep arc are required, but
Emerson recommends a minimum of 8 data points (samples)
acquired over a sweep arc of at least 90°.

Note
For the greatest accuracy and repeatability, all readings should be
acquired using the same direction of rotation. In addition, it is best to
use the same direction of rotation as the machine normally operates.

Although the 8215/8225 laser fixtures are designed to be rotated a full revolution
in two seconds - a smooth, uniform acceleration and deceleration during the rota-
tion of the laser heads is necessary for accurate, reliable, and repeatable data collec-
tion.

Caution!
To prevent damage to the laser heads, make sure the antennas do not come into
contact with obstacles (e.g. the ground or base plate) as they are being rotated.
Also, when performing an uncoupled alignment and the laser heads are
mounted in close proximity to each other, make sure the antennas do not come
into contact with each other as one laser head is rotated past the other.

Clear key
Use the Clear key to clear the displayed data average, when the Laser Mode is set to
Averaging. When the Laser Mode is set to Standard, this key is not available.

Laser Address Selection 3-97


Foot Pre-Check key
Use the Foot Pre-Check key to perform a Soft Foot or FDI check. If you choose to
do one of the Foot Pre-Check procedures then the software returns a warning that
any data, previously collected and contained in the current data set, is deleted by
proceding with this operation. Refer to the Foot Pre-Check section on page 3-76
for more information about performing a Foot Pre-Check.

Check Lasers key


Use the Check Lasers key on the Alt screen to check the operational status of the
heads. Refer to the Check Lasers section on page 3-30 for more information.

Review Results key


Use the Review Results key on the Alt screen to return to the Review Measurements
screen where you can continue reviewing and averaging together the results from
multiple acquisitions. This key is available only when the Review Results option is
enabled on the Alt Main screen and the Review Measurements screen has been
exited before the averaged reading set was saved. Refer to the Review Results sec-
tion on page 3-121 for more information.

3-98 Horizontal Alignment


Note
A maximum of 20 reading sets (moves) can be stored on an align-
ment job. If more than 20 reading sets are acquired a message is dis-
played giving you the option to either discard the last reading set
taken or overwrite the 20th reading set with the last reading.

Acquiring data using Manual Sweep

Enter key
Use the Enter key to accept the data, after you have acquired enough data (sam-
ples). At this point the data is analyzed and a sine wave is curve fit to the data.
With Review Results enabled on the Alt Main Screen and a satisfactory fit (85% and
above), the program marks the Sweep Laser Heads step as complete (Main
Screen) and advances to the Review Measurements screen.
In addition to marking the Sweep Laser Heads step complete, the number of
moves displayed in the upper section of the main screen is updated.

Laser Address Selection 3-99


If the fit is unsatisfactory (less than 85%), a warning message displays to inform that
the data is “Unfit”. At this point either repeat the data acquisition, or try to manually
condition or edit the data using the edit data function. This built-in check helps
alert you to a problem with the reliability of the colleted data.. Refer to the Display
Sine Fit section on page 3-168 for more information.

Note
Remember, when shaft movement is due to factors other than mis-
alignment measured, this will appear as randomness (noise) in the
data. This is not normally a problem when the misalignment is great,
but will increasingly interfere as the misalignment decreases. There-
fore, the better the alignment the more likely the chance will be of
getting an unfit data warning.

If you do encounter a machine where this becomes a problem too great to over-
come (for example an unfit sine curve or the presence of too much background
vibration), consider switching to an alternative method such as Auto 4 Point. Refer
to the Sweep Mode Curve Data section on page 3-126 and Data Quality section on
page 3-127 for more information.

Auto 4 Point
If Auto 4 Point has been defined as the laser alignment method for the job, data is
acquired at the traditional cardinal positions (0°, 90°, 180°, and 270°). In this
method, the laser head’s built-in inclinometers are used while the shaft is rotated,
but data is automatically acquired and stored in the Laser Align program instead of
in the laser heads.

Note
Both laser heads need to be turned on for this option to function
properly.

When setting the job up to use Auto 4 Point as the Laser Align Method for
acquiring data, you must also set the sample rate. The sample rate determines the
number of data samples that are to be collected and averaged together to produce
a single Laser PSD reading.

3-100 Horizontal Alignment


Note
When using the Auto 4 Point method, an alternative option to
increasing the number of samples (or increasing the data averaging
beyond 25 samples per reading), would be to stop the laser fixtures at
each of the four clock positions and allow the program to continu-
ously average the data.

Starting Auto 4 Point

On the data acquisition screen for Auto 4 Point, the current angle position for each
laser head is displayed just below the corresponding machine. The background
area of the angle position is white if the laser heads are not within 5° of each other
and 3° of the active cardinal position. The background area of the angle position is
green if the laser heads are within 5° of each other and 3° of the active cardinal posi-
tion.

Laser Address Selection 3-101


In addition to the green background, the analyzer LED will flash each time a new
reading is measured when the laser heads are within 5° of each other and 3° of the
active cardinal position. If the Status Beeper option located under the 2130 ana-
lyzer’s Home/General Setup screen is enabled you will also hear the analyzer beep
each time a new reading is measured when the laser heads are within 5° of each
other and 3° of the active cardinal position.
If the Status Beeper option located under the 2130 analyzer’s Home/General
Setup screen is disabled the analyzer will not beep when the laser heads are within
5° of each other and 3° of the active cardinal position. In this case only the analyzer
LED will flash as described above.
The current laser reading (in mils or mm, depending on the analyzer units) for
each laser head is displayed in reverse video just below the corresponding angle
position. These readings are continuously averaged whenever the laser heads are at
one of the cardinal positions and automatically recorded when the shaft is rotated
to the next position. The averaging process reduces variation from jitter due to
background vibration or from slight changes in the angular position of the heads.
The traditional cardinal positions (0°, 90°, 180°, and 270°) are displayed graphically
at the bottom of the screen just below the corresponding laser reading. The active
position (highlighted with the red box around it) is the one for which data is being
acquired.

3-102 Horizontal Alignment


Caution!
To prevent damage to the laser heads, make sure the antennas do not come into
contact with obstacles (e.g., the ground or base plate) as they are being rotated.
Also, when performing an uncoupled alignment and the laser heads are
mounted in close proximity to each other, make sure the antennas do not come
into contact with each other as one laser head is rotated past the other.

Acquiring Auto 4 Point Data

If the laser heads can only be rotated to three of the cardinal positions, the reading
for the fourth will automatically be calculated when “Enter” is pressed after the
third reading has been acquired. Using only three readings increases the likeli-
hood of error and does not allow the instrument to check data validity. Emerson
does not recommend using only three readings if four are available.

Clear key
Use the Clear key to clear and restart the current averaged laser reading for each
laser head at any time.

Laser Address Selection 3-103


Foot Pre-Check key
Use the Foot Pre-Check key to perform a Soft Foot or FDI check. If you choose to
do one of the Foot Pre-Check procedures, the software warns you that any previ-
ously collected data in the present data collection set will be deleted. Refer to the
Foot Pre-Check section on page 3-76 for more information about performing a
Foot Pre-Check.

Check Lasers key


Use the Check Lasers key on the Alt screen to check the operational status of the
heads. Refer to the Check Lasers section on page 3-30 for more information.

Review Results key


Use the Review Results key on the Alt screen to return to the Review Measurements
screen where you can continue reviewing and averaging together the results from
multiple acquisitions. This key is available only when the Review Results option is
enabled on the Alt Main screen and the Review Measurements screen has been
exited before the averaged reading set was saved. Refer to the Review Results sec-
tion on page 3-121 for more information.

Enter key
Use the Enter key to accept the data, after you have acquired it. At this point the
data is checked for validity. Refer to the Data Quality section on page 3-127 for
more information.
If the data validity is satisfactory, and Review Results is enabled on the Alt Main
screen, the software displays the Review Measurements screen. If data validity is sat-
isfactory and Review Results is not enabled, the program will mark the Sweep Laser
Heads step back on the Main screen completed and advance you to the next step
in the procedure. In addition to marking the Sweep Laser Heads step complete,
the number of moves displayed in the upper section of the main screen is updated.

Note
A maximum of 20 reading sets (moves) can be stored on an align-
ment job. If more than 20 reading sets are acquired a message is dis-
played giving you the option to either discard the last reading set
taken or overwrite the 20th reading set with the last reading.

3-104 Horizontal Alignment


If the data validity is unsatisfactory a warning message displays to inform you that an
unsatisfactory data validity condition exists. At this point you should repeat the data
acquisition. This built-in check helps alert you to the data losing reliability in the
misalignment calculations.

Note
For the greatest accuracy and repeatability, all readings should be
acquired using the same direction of rotation. In addition, it is best to
rotate the heads in the same direction the machine rotates when run-
ning.

Note
Remember, when shaft movement due to factors other than misalignment is
present in the data, this will appear as randomness (noise) in the data. This is
not normally a problem when the misalignment is great, but will increas-
ingly interfere as the misalignment decreases. Therefore, the better the align-
ment the more likely the chance will be of getting a data validity warning.

Manual 4 Point
If Manual 4 Point has been defined as the laser alignment method for the job, the
user has complete control over when data is acquired and which of the four mea-
surement positions data is to be acquired in. This method is useful when the
machinery is not mounted in a true horizontal orientation, so that the inclinom-
eter is not effective, or when the clock positions relative to vertical and horizontal
base movements of the machine are nonstandard. This method is similar to Auto
4 Point except in this method data is manually acquired and stored in the Laser
Align program. Also, readings are not continuously averaged whenever the laser
heads are at one of the cardinal positions.

Note
Both laser heads need to be turned on for this option to function
properly.

Laser Address Selection 3-105


When setting the job up to use Manual 4 Point as the Laser Align Method for
acquiring data, you must also set the sample rate. The sample rate determines the
number of data samples that are to be collected and averaged together to produce
a single Laser PSD reading.

Starting Manual 4 Point

On the data acquisition screen for Manual 4 Point, the current angle position for
each laser head is displayed just below the corresponding machine. The back-
ground area of the angle position will be white if the laser heads are not within 5°
of each other and 3° of the active cardinal position. The background area of the
angle position will be green if the laser heads are within 5° of each other and 3° of
the active cardinal position.
In Manual 4 Point, the analyzer LED and beeper are not active when the laser
heads are within 5° of each other and 3° of the active cardinal position as it is in
Auto 4 Point.

3-106 Horizontal Alignment


Accept Readings key
Use the Accept Readings key, when the laser head positions and data are as desired,
to store the data at the active cardinal position. Each time a data point is stored the
next cardinal position in the clockwise direction is selected (highlighted with the
red box around it).

Hide Laser Angle key


Use the Hide Laser Angle key on the Alt Manual 4 Point screen to hide the laser
angle. This option is necessary when performing alignments on vertically mounted
machinery where the movement is at the feet instead of a flange and on machinery
where the clock positions relative to vertical and horizontal base movements of the
machine are nonstandard. This option can also be changed from the Alt Laser
Head Status screen and the Manual 4 Point Live Move option.

Show Laser Angle key


Use the Show Laser Angle key similarly as you would the Hide Laser Angle key
except this key is used to show the laser angle if it is hidden. This option can also be
changed from the Alt Laser Head Status screen and the Manual 4 Point Live Move
option.
The current laser reading (in mils or mm, depending on the analyzer units) for
each laser head is displayed in reverse video just below the corresponding angle
position.
The traditional cardinal positions (0°, 90°, 180°, and 270°) are displayed graphically
at the bottom of the screen just below the corresponding laser reading. The active
position (highlighted with the red box around it) is the one for which data is being
acquired.

Left and Right Arrow keys


Use the Left and Right Arrow keys to manually select the active cardinal position.
When using this method, you must be very careful to get the desired readings into
the desired positions. All readings should be 90° from each other, but this does
allow the program to handle special circumstances where the shaft of the machine
is not in the horizontal plane. There are no safeguards against data being placed in
the wrong position.

Laser Address Selection 3-107


Caution!
To prevent damage to the laser heads, make sure the antennas do not come into
contact with obstacles (e.g. the ground or base plate) as they are being rotated.
Also, when performing an uncoupled alignment and the laser heads are
mounted in close proximity to each other, make sure the antennas do not come
into contact with each other as one laser head is rotated past the other.

Foot Pre-Check key


Use the Foot Pre-Check key to perform a Soft Foot or FDI check. If you choose to
do one of the Foot Pre-Check procedures, the software warns you that any previ-
ously collected data in the present data collection set will be deleted. Refer to the
Foot Pre-Check section on page 3-76 for more information about performing a
Foot Pre-Check.

Check Lasers key


Use the Check Lasers key on the Alt screen to check the operational status of the
heads. Refer to the Check Lasers section on page 3-30 for more information.

Review Results key


Use the Review Results key on the Alt screen to return to the Review Measurements
screen where you can continue reviewing and averaging together the results from
multiple acquisitions. This key is available only when the Review Results option is
enabled on the Alt Main screen and the Review Measurements screen has been
exited before the averaged reading set was saved. Refer to the Review Results sec-
tion on page 3-121 for more information.

3-108 Horizontal Alignment


Note
A maximum of 20 reading sets (moves) can be stored on an align-
ment job. If more than 20 reading sets are acquired a message dis-
plays which provides the option to either discard the last reading set
taken or overwrite the 20th reading set with the last reading.

Acquiring Manual 4 Point Data

If the laser heads can only be rotated to three of the cardinal positions, the fourth
will be automatically calculated when Enter is pressed and after the third reading
has been acquired. Using only three readings increases the likelihood of error and
does not allow the instrument to check data validity. Emerson does not recom-
mend using only three readings if four are available.

Clear All key


Use the Clear All key to clear all the data stored at each of the cardinal positions at
any time.

Laser Address Selection 3-109


Enter key
Use the Enter key to accept the data, after you have acquired it. At this point the
data is checked for validity. Refer to the Data Quality section on page 3-127 for
more information.
If the data validity is satisfactory, and Review Results is enabled on the Alt Main
screen, the software displays the Review Measurements screen. If data validity is sat-
isfactory and Review Results is not enabled, the program will mark the Sweep Laser
Heads step back on the Main screen completed and advance you to the next step
in the procedure. In addition to marking the Sweep Laser Heads step complete,
the number of moves displayed in the upper section of the main screen is updated.
If the data validity is unsatisfactory a warning message displays to inform that an
unsatisfactory data validity condition exists. At this point you should repeat the data
acquisition. This built-in check helps alert you to a problem with the reliability of
the collected data.

Note
For the greatest accuracy and repeatability, all readings should be
acquired using the same direction of rotation. In addition, it is best to
rotate the lasers in the same direction the machine rotates when run-
ning.

Note
Remember, when shaft movement due to causes other than misalignment is
present in the data, this will appear as randomness (noise) in the data. This is
not normally a problem when the misalignment is great, but will increas-
ingly interfere as the misalignment decreases. Therefore, the better the align-
ment the more likely the chance will be of getting a data validity warning.

3-110 Horizontal Alignment


Dual Pass
If Dual Pass has been defined as the laser alignment method for the job, the laser
heads automatically acquire data using their built-in inclinometers as each laser
head passes by each other. Except for how the data is acquired, this method func-
tions similar to Auto Sweep, but like Manual Sweep, it is useful for performing
uncoupled or non-rotational alignments.
The arc of rotation can vary from as little as 45° to a full 360° (one revolution). This
method is especially useful when the 4 point measurement technique is impractical
or when inconsistencies in shaft position exist at points in the rotation.

Note
Both laser heads need to be turned on for this option to function
properly.

With this method, PSD and angle data are only taken when the laser beam of each
laser head enters the “valid data” window centered on the vertical centerline of the
other head’s PSD.

Note
With the Dual Pass method, a special cable is required to synchronize
the two laser heads since they will be moved independently of each
other and will not always be in alignment with each other. When
using direct connect communication, the Model 821510 direct con-
nect cable is connected between the laser heads and analyzer to syn-
chronize the laser heads while using the Dual Pass method. When
using RF communication, the Model 8215C2-PM Dual Pass cable is
connected between the two laser heads to synchronize the laser
heads while using the Dual Pass method. For longer spans the Model
800002 and Model 800003 extension cables can be added between
the Model 821510 direct connect cable and Model 8215C2-PM Dual
Pass cable and the laser heads. No matter which communication
method you choose to use, the appropriate cable must be connected
to the laser fixtures prior to initializing them.

Laser Address Selection 3-111


Note
The Model 800001 direct connect cable can be used to enable the
laser heads to communicate with the analyzer except when using the
Dual Pass method.

When setting the job up to use Dual Pass as the Laser Align Method for acquiring
data, you must also set the Target Window percentage.

Target Window
When using the Dual Pass method, data closest to the PSD's vertical centerline is
used to calculate the alignment condition of the machinery being aligned. The
Target Window determines the size of the valid data window around the vertical
centerline of the other laser head's PSD in which data is to be acquired as the laser
beam passes across the PSD. No data is acquired as the laser beam passes across the
PSD outside of the valid data window. The Target Window can be set to 10%, 25%,
50%, 75%, and 100%. The default is 100%. Typically a 100% Target Window is suf-
ficient, but for increased accuracy and repeatability you may want to decrease the
size of the Target Window to ensure that data is being acquired as close to the PSD's
vertical centerline as possible.

3-112 Horizontal Alignment


Note
If a lower percentage (smaller valid window) is selected, a slower rota-
tional speed may be required especially with a smaller PSD (e.g. with
the 10x10mm PSD on the 8215). For example, a 10% Target
Window would define a 2mm wide window on an 8225 and a 1mm
wide window on an 8215 centered around the PSD's vertical center-
line in which data will be acquired as the laser beam passes across the
window.

Starting Dual Pass

The first data acquisition screen for Dual Pass, prompts you to turn on and position
the laser heads at the starting angle. For this method, the laser beams do not have
to be on the PSD (unlike the other methods); therefore, the position of each laser
head can be at any angular position from which you desire to start. It is not required
to define a sweep arc range and direction of rotation due to the process which auto-
matically defines the direction of rotation.

Laser Address Selection 3-113


Initialize Lasers key
Use the Initialize Lasers key to initialize the laser heads and advance to the next step
in the procedure. The Enter key can be used to do the same.

Foot Pre-Check key


Use the Foot Pre-Check key to perform a Soft Foot or FDI check. If you choose to
do one of the Foot Pre-Check procedures, the software warns you that any previ-
ously collected data in the present data collection set will be deleted. Refer to the
Foot Pre-Check section on page 3-76 for more information about performing a
Foot Pre-Check.

Check Lasers key


Use the Check Lasers key on the Alt screen to check the operational status of the
heads. Refer to the Check Lasers section on page 3-30 for more information.

Review Results key


Use the Review Results key on the Alt screen to return to the Review Measurements
screen where you can continue reviewing and averaging together the results from
multiple acquisitions. This key is available only when the Review Results option is
enabled on the Alt Main screen and the Review Measurements screen has been
exited before the averaged reading set was saved. Refer to the Review Results sec-
tion on page 3-121 for more information.

3-114 Horizontal Alignment


Note
A maximum of 20 reading sets (moves) can be stored on an align-
ment job. If more than 20 reading sets are acquired a message is dis-
played giving you the option to either discard the last reading set
taken or overwrite the 20th reading set with the last reading.

Acquiring data using Dual Pass

Once the laser heads have been initialized, the above screen prompts you to
acquire the data by rotating the laser heads.

Get Data from Lasers key


Use the Get Data from Lasers key, after the laser heads have been rotated, to
transmit or transfer the data from the laser heads to the analyzer and advance to
the next step in the procedure. The Enter key can be used to do the same.

Laser Address Selection 3-115


Note
For the Auto Sweep and Dual Pass methods, if the laser heads have
not yet been initialized and they have not been turned off since they
acquired the last set of data, the data stored in the heads can be trans-
ferred to the analyzer without having to re-sweep the laser heads. This
is done using the Resend Data option on Alt Laser Configuration
screen. This is useful if for some reason the data transfer from the
heads to the analyzer was aborted before it was complete.

Note
For the greatest accuracy and repeatability, all readings should be
acquired using the same direction of rotation. In addition, it is best to
rotate the laser heads in the same direction the machine rotates when
running.

The 8215/8225 laser fixtures are designed to be rotated a full revolution in two sec-
onds. As with any sweep, a smooth, uniform acceleration and deceleration during
the rotation of the laser heads is necessary for accurate, reliable, and repeatable
data.

Caution!
To prevent damage to the laser heads, make sure the antennas do not come into
contact with obstacles (e.g. the ground or base plate) as they are being rotated.
Also, when performing an uncoupled alignment and the laser heads are
mounted in close proximity to each other, make sure the antennas do not come
into contact with each other as one laser head is rotated past the other.

The typical method of operation will be for the user to initialize the laser heads with the ana-
lyzer. One of the heads will then be moved to a new position. Then the second head will be
moved past the first head to a new position. As the laser heads pass each other, the data will
be acquired. The first head will then be moved past the second head to a new position.
Again, as the laser heads pass each other, both laser heads will acquire the data. This method
continues until the user has acquired the necessary number of passes and downloads the
data to the analyzer. This may include several full rotations of the laser heads.

3-116 Horizontal Alignment


The following scenario will more clearly illustrate how the Dual Pass method oper-
ates.
1. When the analyzer initializes the laser heads, all data is cleared.
2. The laser heads then begin detecting the presence of the other laser head’s
laser beam on its PSD. If a laser beam is not on a PSD, the laser head's LED
will be flashed solid yellow.
3. When the laser beam on the other laser head is detected on its PSD, the laser
beam is tracked as it crosses the PSD. As soon as the laser beam is detected
on the PSD, the LED on the laser head will be or continue to be (depending
on the state it originally started from) flashed solid yellow.
4. When a laser beam enters the “valid data” window around its PSD’s vertical
centerline, data is acquired. As valid data is acquired, the laser head will flash
its LED green once.
5. Data continues to be acquired while a laser beam is within the “valid data”
window. The position data that is closest to the vertical centerline (i.e.
horizontal position closest to zero) is the value that is retained along with its
angular position. As each data sample is taken the LED on the Laser Head
will flash green to indicate that a valid data point has been acquired.
6. If a laser beam passes across the PSD so quickly that a data point is not
acquired within the “valid data” window, no data will be acquired.
7. When a laser beam leaves the PSD completely, the acquired data point is
committed and stored.
8. The laser heads again begin detecting the presence of the other laser head’s
laser beam on its PSD and their LED's flash solid yellow.

Note
Once a valid reading is acquired, before it is committed and stored,
the laser beam must leave the PSD completely.

Note
A reflected laser beam may strike the PSD in the valid window causing
the LED to flash green. If this were to occur, this data (or event) would
be considered invalid and ignored by the laser heads.

Laser Address Selection 3-117


Note
A minimum of 3 data points over a 45° sweep arc are required, but
Emerson recommends a minimum of 8 data points be acquired over
a sweep arc of at least 90°.

Note
Depending on the model, make sure either the Model 821510 or
8215C2-PM cable is connected to the laser fixtures prior to initializing
them.

Getting data from heads

3-118 Horizontal Alignment


During the data transfer, the previous screen shows the progress of the data transfer
for each laser head. When the data transfer is complete, the data is analyzed and a
sine wave is fit to the data.. If the fit is satisfactory (85% and above), the program will
mark the Sweep Laser Heads step back on the Main screen completed and
advance you to the next step in the procedure. In addition to marking the Sweep
Laser Heads step complete, the number of moves displayed in the upper section of
the main screen is updated.
If the fit is unsatisfactory (less than 85%) a warning message displays to inform you
that the data is “Unfit”. At this point you should either repeat the data acquisition
or try to manually condition or edit the data using the edit data function. This built-
in check helps alert you to a concern with the reliability of the collected data. Refer
to the Display Sine Fit section on page 3-168 for more information.

Note
Remember, when shaft movement due to factors other than misalign-
ment is present in the data this will appear as randomness (noise) in
the data. This is not normally a problem when the misalignment is
great, but will increasingly interfere as the misalignment decreases.
Therefore, the better the alignment the more likely the chance will
be of getting an unfit data warning.

If you do encounter a machine where this becomes a problem too great to over-
come (for example an unfit sine curve or the presence of too much background
vibration), consider switching to an alternative method such as Manual Sweep or
Auto 4 Point. Refer to the Sweep Mode Curve Data section on page 3-126 and Data
Quality section on page 3-127 for more information.

Dual Pass Cable (8215C2-PM) - Models 821500 and 822500 Only


The 8215C2-PM Dual Pass cable is required when using the Dual Pass method for
RF communication between the analyzer and the laser fixtures.

Laser Address Selection 3-119


To connect the 8215C2-PM Dual Pass cable to the laser fixtures, complete these
steps:
1. Connect the Lemo connector on one end of the Dual Pass cable to the
mating straight Lemo connector of the extension cable, if applicable.
2. Connect the Lemo connector on one end of the cable to the Lemo port
under the nose of one of the laser fixtures.
3. Connect the Lemo connector on the opposite end of the cable to the Lemo
port under the nose of the other laser fixture.

Note
When connecting the Lemo connector to its mating connector, line
up the red dots located on each connector with each other before
completing the connections.

Caution!
To complete connection and prevent damage to the laser heads and cables, make
sure to push the connector together (Do not twist!).

From this point on, Dual Pass is very easy to use. The analyzer determines that it is
connected. Cables can be unplugged and reconnected at any time (and at any con-
nection). You do not have to remember which end of the cable is plugged to which
head. Even if you switch the orientation of the cables (when reconnecting), the
analyzer can adjust to the change and will still work correctly.
The Dual Pass cable (8215C2-PM), required when using the Dual Pass method with
RF communication is 2 feet (0.61 m) long. When connected to the laser heads up
to a 20 inch (508 mm) span can be aligned. Extension cables (Models 800002 and
800003) are available for longer spans.

Note
With the 8215, a maximum of 30 feet (9 m) between laser heads can
be achieved. With the 8225, a maximum of 100 feet (30.5 m) between
laser heads can be achieved.

3-120 Horizontal Alignment


Extension cables are 8 feet (2.4 m) long. With one extension cable and the Dual
Pass cable, the total length is 10 feet (3 m) allowing a 9 feet 8 inch (2.9 m) span to
be aligned.

Note
For similar information on connecting the 821510 direct connect
cable when using the Dual Pass method for direct connect communi-
cation between the analyzer and the laser fixtures, refer to Direct
Connect (All Models) section for more information.

Review Results
From the Review Results (Measurements) screen, you are able to review and
average together the results from multiple acquisitions. This option is useful when
the repeatability of the data is a concern. Refer to the Sweep Mode Curve Data sec-
tion on page 3-126 and Data Quality section on page 3-127 for more information.
The Review Measurements screen is automatically displayed immediately after
acquiring a set of alignment data when the Review Results option is enabled on the
Alt Main screen. This option is not available when Quick Spec mode is activated.
Refer to the Quick Spec section on page 3-53 for more information.

Laser Address Selection 3-121


Note
If you exit the Review Measurements screen before saving the aver-
aged reading set, you can return to it using the Review Results key on
the Alt screen of the data acquisition screens.

Review Measurements Screen

The Review Measurements screen contains the alignment condition, the acquisi-
tion date and time, and a symbol representing the acquisition method used for
each of the readings acquired. The table can contain a maximum of 10 readings.

3-122 Horizontal Alignment


If the Tolerance Type is Standard, alignment angle and offset data are displayed for
both the vertical and horizontal directions. If the Tolerance Type is Jackshaft, align-
ment left machine angle and right machine angle data are displayed.

Offset Icon Angle Icon

An icon depicting the alignment method and data condition displays just to the far
right of each data reading.

If Auto Sweep, Manual Sweep, or Dual Pass was used to acquire the reading
and data quality is 85% or greater the icon will have a green background. If data
quality is 70% or greater, but less than 85% the icon will have a yellow background.
If data quality is less than 70% the icon will have a red background.

If Auto 4 Point or Manual 4 Point was used to acquire the reading and data
validity is good the icon will have a green background. If data validity is poor the
icon will have a yellow background. If data validity is bad the icon will have a red
background. If one of the four points had been estimated the icon will have a gray
background.
The average reading set is displayed at the bottom of the screen. If the alignment
condition is within the acceptable tolerance value, the background color will be
green. If it is within 1 to 2 times the acceptable tolerance value the background
color will be yellow. If it is greater than 2 times the acceptable tolerance value, the
background color will be red. Refer to the Tolerances section on page 3-193 for
more information.

Up and Down Arrows


Use the Up and Down Arrow keys to scroll through the list of readings one at a
time. The keys wrap around the list of readings. These keys are only active when
more than one reading is listed. The Reading Up and Down Arrow soft keys can be
used to do the same.

Laser Address Selection 3-123


Enter key
Use the Enter key to save the average reading set and advance to the tolerance plot
screens where graphical representations of the alignment condition can be
reviewed.

Note
If any reading used to calculate an average reading set was acquired
using Auto Sweep, Manual Sweep, or Dual Pass, the associated sine fit
data will not be saved once the average reading set is saved.

Review Results (Measurements) Function Keys

Repeat Reading
Use the Repeat Reading key to return back to the data acquisitions screen where
additional data can be acquired. This key is only active when 10 or less readings are
is listed.

Note
When 10 readings are displayed, you will need to delete a reading
before you will be able to acquire another reading.

Note
If you exit the Review Measurements screen when 10 readings are dis-
played, then go to the Sweep Laser Heads step and acquire an eleventh
reading, a warning message will be displayed when you return to the
Review Measurements screen. The warning message will give you the
option of either discarding the eleventh reading or deleting the first reading
and keeping the eleventh. If you answer yes, then the first reading is deleted
and the eleventh reading kept. If you answer no, then the eleventh reading is
discarded. If you answer yes to deleting the first reading, it cannot be
retrieved.

3-124 Horizontal Alignment


Select/Unselect
Use the Select/Unselect key to select the highlighted reading (place a check mark
just to the left of the reading), or if the reading has already been selected, to unse-
lect the reading (remove the check mark). The selected readings are used to calcu-
late the average reading set displayed at the bottom of the screen. The average
reading set will be updated when readings are selected or cleared. This key is only
active when more than one reading is listed.

Delete Reading
Use the Delete Reading key to delete the highlighted reading. Before any reading
is deleted, a warning message displays asking you if this is truly the operation to be
performed. If you answer yes, then the highlighted reading will be deleted. If you
answer no, then the operation is aborted. If the highlighted reading happens to be
one of the selected readings used to calculate the average reading set displayed at
the bottom of the screen the average reading set will be updated when the reading
is deleted. This key is only active when more than one reading is listed.

Caution!
Use extreme caution with the delete reading option when the analyzer contains
important alignment data. Once you answer yes to the warning message all
data associated with the deleted reading will be lost.

Data Detail
Use the Data Detail key to advance to the tolerance plot screens where graphical
representations of the alignment condition can be reviewed. Refer to the Data
Detail (Tolerance Plots) section on page 3-162 for more information. In addition,
if the data was acquired using the Auto Sweep, Dual Pass, or Manual Sweep
methods you can manually condition or edit the sine curve data using the edit data
function.

Note
The average reading set will be displayed on the tolerance plots along
with any previously saved reading sets. However, the Display Sine Fit
and View Data keys, available on the tolerance plot screens, display
the alignment information for the reading set highlighted back on
the Review Measurements screen.

Laser Address Selection 3-125


Reading Up and Down Arrows
Use the Reading Up and Down Arrow keys to scroll through the list of readings one
at a time. These soft keys will wrap around the list. These keys are only active when
more than one reading is listed. The Up and Down Arrow keys can be used to do
the same.

Sweep Mode Curve Data


When using the sweep mode, calculations are completed in the following manner.
If readings were taken from each laser target at 1° intervals (with the position as the
Y- axis and the rotational position as the X-axis), a sine wave would be formed. Even
when only part of the sine wave data is collected, Emerson’s Alignment software can
still curve fit a sine wave to this limited data. Called curve fitting, all values used to
determine the machine moves can be obtained from the completed sine waves.
Emerson recommends you sweep at least 90°; however, accuracy still may be
reduced even at 90°. At the very least, this could result in more machine moves
being required to achieve satisfactory alignment. If data was acquired in a sweep arc
of less than 70°, a warning message will be displayed advising you to retake the data.
If you answer yes, then the data will be discarded and you will be advanced back to
the data acquisition screen. If you answer no, then the data is stored and you
advance to the next step in the procedure.
Each head will store up to 180 readings (the higher the number, the greater the
accuracy), however, all 180 readings are not required to determine the curve fit
sine wave. You must have at least three readings and they should be spaced at large
intervals in the shaft rotation. If too few data points were acquired, a warning mes-
sage displays advising you to retake the data.
After the sweep data has been transferred from the heads to the analyzer, the data
will be automatically curve fit. The quality of the data is shown by the curve fit per-
centage. If more points are located off the sine wave (the greater distance from the
curve), the lower the percentage will be. A high number of points on the curve
mean that most of the data were acquired from points that lay on the sine curve.
Refer to the Data Quality section on page 3-127 for more information.
If the data correlation (curve fit percentage) can not be brought into the accept-
able level, but the peak-peak amplitude of the data is too low, then a message dis-
plays advising you that the machine may be aligned within tolerance and the
accuracy of any further adjustments may be reduced using the available data.

3-126 Horizontal Alignment


If the data correlation can not be brought into the acceptable level but the peak-
peak amplitude is too high, then a message will be displayed advising you to check
the system for looseness and then repeat the measurement. Another possible
reason for this condition could be due to data points lying too far away from the
sine fit curve. To verify this condition, it will be necessary to check the sine fit curve
for points which might lie far away from the sine fit curve and either edit the sine
fit and remove the measurement points which might lie far away from the curve or
change to a four point method and acquire new data.
Bearing faults, rubs, and looseness are all problems which can cause points not to
fall on the curve. These mechanical problems can cause all data to have some low
levels of variability. This variability may appear as randomness, or “noise”. This noise
is not generally of much concern when the level of misalignment is high; however,
as the amplitudes measured from misalignment decrease then the ratio of noise to
the signal increases and the percentages of fit may worsen. Although the program
automatically conditions the data for an improved fit in such a circumstance, there
may be times when the user chooses to change methods or to manually condition
the data using the edit data function. Refer to the Display Sine Fit section on page
3-168 for more information.

Data Quality
When using Auto Sweep, Manual Sweep, or Dual Pass a sine curve is fit to the data
points. This sine curve is analyzed to determine what the projected data would be
at each of the clock positions mentioned above in the Auto 4 Point method. If the
fit of the curve to the data points is marginal, then the data can be automatically
conditioned to improve the sine fit. The resultant fit may be viewed and can be
manually conditioned if desired. This procedure is discussed in the application
chapter.
If the analyzer is unable to condition the data suitably, then a message will be dis-
played warning of an “Unfit Data” condition. There is always some variability intro-
duced into data due to shaft clearances, bearing faults, base deterioration, etc. If
this variability becomes significant compared to the amount of misalignment (for
example, due to the presence of too much background vibration), it may become
necessary to look at the sine fit curve in order to determine the cause of the unfit
sine fit and take corrective action. Alternatively, it may become necessary to use a 4
Point or Manual Sweep Method to acquire data. Changing methods does not
require the job to be redefined. Merely select a new alignment method from the
Alt Main screen and retake the last set of data.

Laser Address Selection 3-127


When using any 4 point method the data is always checked for validity. In theory,
subtracting any third measurement from the sum of two opposing measurements
will give the value of the 4th measurement (the one opposite the third measure-
ment). For example, add the left and right measurements together then subtract
the top measurement. The results should approximately equal the value of the
bottom measurement. If this comparison varies by more than 20%, a message will
be displayed warning of a Data Validity Error Reading Error Above 20%. When this
happens, retake the last readings to check for accuracy before proceeding. There
is always some variability introduced into data due to shaft clearances, bearing
faults, base deterioration, etc.

Note
A maximum of 20 reading sets (moves) can be stored on an align-
ment job. If more than 20 reading sets are acquired a message is dis-
played giving you the option to either discard the last reading set
taken or overwrite the 20th reading set with the last reading.

3-128 Horizontal Alignment


Move Machine
Once all required data has been acquired, the screen automatically advances to the
Move Machine step. From the Main screen, the Move Machine step is reached by
pressing the Move Machine key.

Main screen after acquiring alignment data

From the Move Machine step, you can review the machine moves for the vertical
and horizontal directions. Refer to the Vertical Move section on page 3-130 and
Horizontal Move section on page 3-135 for more information. If an alignment cor-
rection is necessary that requires a live move, this can also be done from this step.
Refer to the Live Move section on page 3-149 for more information.
In Quick Spec Mode, only tolerance plot information will be available since
machine move information can not be calculated without machine dimensions.
For this reason, the tolerance plot screens will be displayed immediately after data
has been acquired and analyzed. Refer to the Quick Spec section on page 3-53 for
more information.

Laser Address Selection 3-129


To provide assistance for varying applications and circumstances, a couple of addi-
tional options are provided. These additional options include:
• An Extra Foot Calculation
This option provides a calculation of the vertical and horizontal machine moves at
machine foot locations other than those defined for the job. Refer to the Extra Foot
Calculation section on page 3-143 for more information.
• A Predict Mode
This option allows you to calculate the resulting alignment condition based on the
current alignment condition and making the machine moves you enter. Refer to
the Predict Mode section on page 3-145 for more information.

Vertical Move
From the Vertical Move screen, you can review the machine moves for the vertical
direction.

Vertical Move Screen

3-130 Horizontal Alignment


The amount of movement at the machine feet (expressed in either mils or millime-
ters (mm), depending on the analyzer units) is displayed in the upper section of
the screen. If the movement is positive (upward) it will be displayed above the
machine. If the movement is negative (downward) it will be displayed below the
machine. In addition to the amount of movement, an arrow representing the
direction of movement is also displayed at the machine feet where moves are to be
made.
The bull’s-eye target displayed in the lower section of the screen represents the
alignment condition with respect to the tolerances defined for the job. If the toler-
ance condition is greater than 2 times the acceptable tolerance, then the outer
band will be red. If the tolerance condition is 1 to 2 times the acceptable tolerance,
then the middle band will be yellow. If the tolerance condition is less than the
acceptable tolerance, but greater than the excellent tolerance, then the center
band (bull’s-eye) will be green. If the tolerance condition is less than the excellent
tolerance, then the center band will have a black star displayed in it. Refer to the
Tolerances section on page 3-193 for more information.
When the Enable Alert option is enabled, the analyzer LED will flash during the live
move when the machine alignment condition reaches the target tolerance values.
Increasing and decreasing flash rates indicate when the machine alignment crosses
through the acceptable and excellent tolerance condition thresholds described
above. The number of flashes and flash rate will be consistent with the audible tone
generated when the machine alignment condition reaches the target tolerance
values. Refer to the Job Flow section on page 3-42 for more information.
If the Status Beeper option located under the 2130 analyzer’s Home/General
Setup screen is enabled and the Enable Alert option is enabled, the audible tone
will be generated as described above, but if the Status Beeper option located under
the 2130 analyzer’s Home/General Setup screen is disabled and the Enable Alert
option is enabled, the audible tone will not be generated as described above. In this
case only the analyzer LED will flash as described above.
When the Enable Alert option is disabled, the analyzer LED will not flash and an
audible tone will not be generated when the machine alignment condition reaches
the target tolerance values.

Laser Address Selection 3-131


The alignment condition of the machine with respect to the machine components
defined for the job is displayed in the upper section of the screen while the align-
ment condition of the machine with respect to the machine centerlines (repre-
sented by dashed lines) is displayed in the lower section of the screen. In addition
to the machine centerlines, the acceptable angular tolerance band (represented by
an angle bracket) and offset tolerance band (represented by a square bracket) are
also displayed in the lower section of the screen.

Left and Right Arrow keys


Use the Left and Right Arrow keys to toggle the machine move sets between alter-
nate pairs of feet. The Alternate Move key can be used to do the same. Refer to the
Vertical Move Function Keys: Alternate Move section (below) for more informa-
tion.

Enter key
Use the Enter key to advance to the next step in the Horizontal Move screen.

Vertical Move Function Keys

Extra Foot
Use the Extra Foot key to advance to the Extra Foot screen where the vertical and
horizontal machine moves for machine foot locations in addition to the ones
defined for the job can be calculated. Refer to the Extra Foot Calculation section
on page 3-143 for more information. This option is available only when the selected
machine move foot pairs are located only on the left machine or the right machine.

Alternate Move
Use the Alternate Move key to toggle the machine move sets between alternate
pairs of feet. The Left and Right Arrow keys can be used to do the same.
• If the RPM and all machine dimensions have been entered, then a total of six (6)
alternate moves will be available.
• If only the RPM and A, B, C, and F dimensions have been entered, then no alter-
nate solutions will be available for the right machine. In this case, a warning mes-
sage will be displayed when this key is selected. The warning message will prompt
you to verify whether or not you want to input the missing dimensions required. If
you answer yes, then you will be advanced to the Enter Dimensions screen. If you
answer no, then the operation is aborted.

3-132 Horizontal Alignment


From the Enter Dimensions screen, once the required dimensions have been
entered, the Enter key will advance you back to the Move Machine screen.
• If only the RPM and D, E, C, and F dimensions have been entered, then no alter-
nate solutions will be available for the left machine. In this case, a warning message
will be displayed when this key is selected. The warning message will prompt you to
verify whether or not you want to input the missing dimensions required. If you
answer yes, then you will be advanced to the Enter Dimensions screen. If you answer
no, then the operation is aborted.
From the Enter Dimensions screen, once the required dimensions have been
entered, the Enter key will advance you back to the Move Machine screen.
• If the A dimension is the only dimension missing, then no alternate solutions that
include the A dimension will be available.
• If the E dimension is the only dimension missing, then no alternate solutions that
include the E dimension will be available.
• If the B dimension is the only dimension missing, then no alternate solutions will be
available for the left machine. In this case, a warning message will be displayed when
this key is selected. The warning message will prompt you to verify whether or not
you want to input the missing dimensions required. If you answer yes, then you will
be advanced to the Enter Dimensions screen. If you answer no, then the operation
is aborted.
From the Enter Dimensions screen, once the required dimensions have been
entered, the Enter key will advance you back to the Move Machine screen.
• If the D dimension is the only dimension missing, then no alternate solutions will
be available for the right machine. In this case, a warning message will be displayed
when this key is selected. The warning message will prompt you to verify whether or
not you want to input the missing dimensions required. If you answer yes, then you
will be advanced to the Enter Dimensions screen. If you answer no, then the oper-
ation is aborted.
From the Enter Dimensions screen, once the required dimensions have been
entered, the Enter key will advance you back to the Move Machine screen.

Switch Move Type


Use the Switch Move Type key to toggle the displayed move type between Vertical
Move, Horizontal Move, and Dual Move (Horizontal and Vertical).

Laser Address Selection 3-133


Data Detail
Use the Data Detail key to advance to the tolerance plot screens where graphical
representations of the alignment condition can be reviewed. Refer to the Data
Detail (Tolerance Plots) section on page 3-162 for more information. In addition,
if the data was acquired using the Auto Sweep, Dual Pass, or Manual Sweep
methods you can manually condition or edit the sine curve data using the edit data
function.

Predict
Use the Predict key to advance to the Predict Mode screen where the resulting
alignment condition based on the current alignment condition and machine
move values you enter can be calculated. Refer to the Predict Mode section on
page 3-145 for more information. This option is available only when all dimensions
for both machines have been entered.

Live Move
Use the Live Move key to observe machine movement while making machine
moves. Refer to the Live Move section on page 3-149 for more information. If the
Live Move option on the Alt Main screen is set to Horizontal Only, the Live Move
key is not active on the Vertical Move screen. Refer to the Job Flow section on page
3-42 for more information.

3-134 Horizontal Alignment


Horizontal Move
From the Horizontal Move screen review the machine moves for the horizontal
direction.

Horizontal Move Screen

The amount of movement at the machine feet (expressed in either mils or millime-
ters (mm), depending on the analyzer units) is displayed in the upper section of
the screen. If the movement is positive (to the left — viewed from the outboard end
of the right machine looking towards the left machine) it will be displayed below
the machine. If the movement is negative (to the right — viewed from the outboard
end of the right machine looking towards the left machine) it will be displayed
above the machine. In addition to the amount of movement, an arrow repre-
senting the direction of movement is also displayed at the machine feet on which
the moves will be made.

Laser Address Selection 3-135


The bull’s-eye target displayed in the lower section of the screen represents the
alignment condition with respect to the tolerances defined for the job. If the toler-
ance condition is greater than 2 times the acceptable tolerance, then the outer
band will be red. If the tolerance condition is 1 to 2 times the acceptable tolerance,
then the middle band will be yellow. If the tolerance condition is less than the
acceptable tolerance, but greater than the excellent tolerance, then the center
band (bull’s-eye) will be green. If the tolerance condition is less than the excellent
tolerance, then the center band will have a black star displayed in it. Refer to the
Tolerances section on page 3-193 for more information.
When the Enable Alert option is enabled, the analyzer LED will flash during the live
move when the machine alignment condition reaches the target tolerance values.
Increasing and decreasing flash rates indicate when the machine alignment crosses
through the acceptable and excellent tolerance condition thresholds described
above. The number of flashes and flash rate will be consistent with the audible tone
generated when the machine alignment condition reaches the target tolerance
values. Refer to the Job Flow section on page 3-42 for more information.
If the Status Beeper option located under the 2130 analyzer’s Home/General
Setup screen is enabled and the Enable Alert option is enabled, the audible tone
will be generated as described above, but if the Status Beeper option located under
the 2130 analyzer’s Home/General Setup screen is disabled and the Enable Alert
option is enabled, the audible tone will not be generated as described above. In this
case only the analyzer LED will flash as described above.
When the Enable Alert option is disabled, the analyzer LED will not flash and an
audible tone will not be generated when the machine alignment condition reaches
the target tolerance values.
The alignment condition of the machine with respect to the machine components
defined for the job is displayed in the upper section of the screen while the align-
ment condition of the machine with respect to the machine centerlines (repre-
sented by dashed lines) is displayed in the lower section of the screen. In addition
to the machine centerlines, the acceptable angular tolerance band (represented by
an angle bracket) and offset tolerance band (represented by a square bracket) are
also displayed in the lower section of the screen.

3-136 Horizontal Alignment


Left and Right Arrow keys
Use the Left and Right Arrow keys to toggle the machine move sets between the
alternate pairs of feet. The Alternate Move key can be used to do the same. Refer
to the Horizontal Move Function Keys: Alternate Move section (below) for more
information.

Enter key
Use the Enter key to advance to the Main screen where the Move Machine step is
marked completed and the Sweep Laser Heads step is highlighted.

Horizontal Move Function Keys

Extra Foot
Use the Extra Foot key to advance to the Extra Foot screen where the vertical and
horizontal machine moves for machine foot locations in addition to the ones
defined for the job can be calculated. Refer to the Extra Foot Calculation section
on page 3-143 for more information. This option is available only when the selected
machine move foot pairs are located only on the left machine or the right machine.

Alternate Move
Use the Alternate Move key to toggle the machine move sets between alternate
pairs of feet. The Left and Right Arrow keys can be used to do the same.
• If the RPM and all machine dimensions have been entered, then a total of six (6)
alternate moves will be available.
• If only the RPM and A, B, C, and F dimensions have been entered, then no alter-
nate solutions will be available for the right machine. In this case, a warning mes-
sage will be displayed when this key is selected. The warning message will prompt
you to verify whether or not you want to input the missing dimensions required. If
you answer yes, then you will be advanced to the Enter Dimensions screen. If you
answer no, then the operation is aborted.
From the Enter Dimensions screen, once the required dimensions have been
entered, the Enter key will advance you back to the Move Machine screen.

Laser Address Selection 3-137


• If only the RPM and D, E, C, and F dimensions have been entered, then no alter-
nate solutions will be available for the left machine. In this case, a warning message
will be displayed when this key is selected. The warning message will prompt you to
verify whether or not you want to input the missing dimensions required. If you
answer yes, then you will be advanced to the Enter Dimensions screen. If you answer
no, then the operation is aborted.
From the Enter Dimensions screen, once the required dimensions have been
entered, the Enter key will advance you back to the Move Machine screen.
• If the A dimension is the only dimension missing, then no alternate solutions that
include the A dimension will be available.
• If the E dimension is the only dimension missing, then no alternate solutions that
include the E dimension will be available.
• If the B dimension is the only dimension missing, then no alternate solutions will be
available for the left machine. In this case, a warning message will be displayed when
this key is selected. The warning message will prompt you to verify whether or not
you want to input the missing dimensions required. If you answer yes, then you will
be advanced to the Enter Dimensions screen. If you answer no, then the operation
is aborted.
From the Enter Dimensions screen, once the required dimensions have been
entered, the Enter key will advance you back to the Move Machine screen.
• If the D dimension is the only dimension missing, then no alternate solutions will
be available for the right machine. In this case, a warning message will be displayed
when this key is selected. The warning message will prompt you to verify whether or
not you want to input the missing dimensions required. If you answer yes, then you
will be advanced to the Enter Dimensions screen. If you answer no, then the oper-
ation is aborted.
From the Enter Dimensions screen, once the required dimensions have been
entered, the Enter key will advance you back to the Move Machine screen.

Switch Move Type


Use the Switch Move Type key to toggle the displayed move type between Vertical
Move, Horizontal Move, and Dual Move (Horizontal and Vertical).

3-138 Horizontal Alignment


Data Detail
Use the Data Detail key to advance to the tolerance plot screens where graphical
representations of the alignment condition can be reviewed. Refer to the Data
Detail (Tolerance Plots) section on page 3-162 for more information. In addition,
if the data was acquired using the Auto Sweep, Dual Pass, or Manual Sweep
methods you can manually condition or edit the sine curve data using the edit data
function.

Predict
Use the Predict key to advance to the Predict Mode screen where the resulting
alignment condition based on the current alignment condition and machine
move values you enter can be calculated. Refer to the Predict Mode section on
page 3-145 for more information. This option is available only when all dimensions
for both machines have been entered.

Live Move
Use the Live Move key to observe machine movement while making machine
moves. Refer to the Live Move section on page 3-149 for more information.

Laser Address Selection 3-139


Dual Move
From the Dual Move screen, you can review the machine moves for both the ver-
tical and horizontal directions at the same time.

Dual Move Screen (machine view)

3-140 Horizontal Alignment


Dual Move Screen (centerline view)

Show Center Lines key


Use the Show Center Lines key to view the alignment condition of the machine
with respect to the machine centerlines.
When viewing the alignment condition of the machine with respect to the machine
centerlines, the amount of movement and direction of movement (represented by
arrows) are displayed at the machine feet where machine moves will be made while
black squares are displayed at the machine feet where machine moves will not to be
made.

Show Machine key


Use the Show Machine key to view the alignment condition of the machine with
respect to the machine components defined for the job.

Laser Address Selection 3-141


Live Move
Use the Live Move key to observe machine movement while making machine
moves. Refer to the Live Move section on page 3-149 for more information. If the
Live Move option on the Alt Main screen is set to Horizontal Only, then the live
move can only be performed in the horizontal direction. Refer to the Job Flow sec-
tion on page 3-42 for more information.

Enter key
Use the Enter key, once you have viewed both the machine moves, to advance to
the Main screen where the Move Machine step is marked completed and the
Sweep Laser Heads step is highlighted.

Main screen after viewing machine moves

3-142 Horizontal Alignment


Extra Foot Calculation
From the Extra Foot Calculation screen you can calculate the vertical and hori-
zontal machine moves for up to four machine foot locations in addtion to those
defined for the job. The Extra Foot Calculation screen is reached by pressing the
Extra Foot key on the machine move screens. This option is available only when the
selected machine move foot pairs are located only on the left machine or the right
machine.

Extra Foot Calculation Screen

Dimensions can be expressed in either inches or millimeters (mm), depending on


the analyzer units. The range of values that can be entered for the A1-A4 and E1-E4
are -3600 to 3600 inches or -91440 to 91440 mm.
When entering any of these dimensions, they should be measured and extended
to the nearest 1/8 inch (3 mm). Refer to the Entering Fractions section on page
3-51 for information about entering fractions.

Laser Address Selection 3-143


Up, Down, Left, and Right Arrow keys
Use the Up, Down, Left, and Right Arrow keys to select the field you want to modify
(highlighted with the red box around it).
Refer to the following table for a description of each dimension.

Measure
Dimension Measurement Description to the
Nearest

Center of outboard foot of the machine on the left to the center of


the extra foot. If the extra foot is located to the right of the
1/8 inch
A1-A4 outboard foot on the left machine, enter a positive (+) value. If
(3 mm)
the extra foot is located to the left of the outboard foot on the left
machine, enter a negative (–) value.

Center of inboard foot of the machine on the right to the center of


the extra foot. If the extra foot is located to the right of the
1/8 inch
E1-E4 inboard foot on the right machine, enter a positive (+) value. If
(3 mm)
the extra foot is located to the left of the inboard foot on the right
machine, enter a negative (–) value.

When a value has been entered in the Dimensions section of the display, then the
vertical (V1-V4) and horizontal (H1-H4) move for those extra feet are calculated
and displayed to the right.
The amount of movement will be expressed in either mils or millimeters (mm),
depending on the analyzer units.

V1-V4
If the movement is upward it displays as a positive number. If the movement is
downward it displays as a negative.

H1-H4
If the movement is to the left (viewed from the outboard end of the right machine
looking towards the left machine) it displays as a positive number. If the movement
is to the right (viewed from the outboard end of the right machine looking towards
the left machine) it displays as a negative number.

3-144 Horizontal Alignment


Note
Extra Foot dimensions and calculations are stored temporarily in ana-
lyzer memory.

Enter key
Use the Enter key to advance back to the move screen this option was accessed
from.

Predict Mode
From the Predict Mode screens you can calculate the resulting alignment condi-
tion based on the current alignment condition and having moved the machine the
amount specified in the program. This is very useful when the machine cannot be
dropped any further in the vertical direction or if the machine is bolt bound hori-
zontally. The Predict Mode screens are reached by pressing the Predict Mode key
on the machine move screens. This option is available only when all dimensions for
both machines have been entered.
Selecting the Predict Mode option from the Vertical Move and Dual Move screens
displays the Predict Mode Vertical screen. This screen displays the movement calcu-
lated by the align program, and required to align the machine vertically. The target
indicates how close the machine vertical position is to being in tolerance. The
screen also allows entry of alternate machine moves for which the predict mode
computes the tolerance values were those moves actually made on the machine.

Laser Address Selection 3-145


The Predict Mode Vertical screen functions similarly to the Predict Mode Horizontal screen
described below.

Predict Mode Horizontal Screen

Selecting the Predict Mode option from the Horizontal Move screen displays the
Predict Mode Horizontal screen. This screen displays the movement calculated by
the align program to align the machine horizontally. The target indicates how close
the machine horizontal position is to being in tolerance.
If a machine cannot be moved the required distance, such as when a foot needs to
be lowered more than the amount of shims already under the foot or if the
machine is bolt bound, try using different move values in order to find the
optimum alignment for the given conditions. The idea is to find a movement solu-
tion that may cause the alignment condition to be in the acceptable or even the
excellent range.

3-146 Horizontal Alignment


The foot pair for which movement is shown corresponds to the foot pair selected
on the machine move screen when the Predict Mode option is selected. The
amount of movement at the machine feet (expressed in either mils or millimeters
(mm), depending on the analyzer units) which the align program calculates in
order to bring the machine into alignment is displayed in the upper section of the
screen. In addition to the amount of movement, an arrow representing the direc-
tion of movement is also displayed at the machine feet where machine moves are
to be made.

Note
You must return to the machine move screen and select a different
foot pair if you wish to see a solution at an alternate foot pair.

Movement in the Vertical Direction


If the movement is positive (upward) it will be displayed above the machine. If the
movement is negative (downward) it will be displayed below the machine.

Movement in the Horizontal Direction


If the movement is positive (to the left — viewed from the outboard end of the right
machine looking towards the left machine) it will be displayed below the machine.
If the movement is negative (to the right — viewed from the outboard end of the
right machine looking towards the left machine) it will be displayed above the
machine.
The bull’s-eye target displayed in the middle of the screen represents the alignment
condition with respect to the tolerances defined for the job. If the tolerance condi-
tion is greater than 2 times the acceptable tolerance, then the outer band will be
red. If the tolerance condition is 1 to 2 times the acceptable tolerance, then the
middle band will be yellow. If the tolerance condition is less than the acceptable tol-
erance, but greater than the excellent tolerance, then the center band (bull’s-eye)
will be green. If the tolerance condition is less than the excellent tolerance, then the
center band will have a black star displayed in it. Refer to the Tolerances section on
page 3-193 for more information.

Left and Right Arrow keys


Use the Left and Right Arrow keys to select the foot (highlighted with the red box
around it) for which you wish to enter the proposed move value.

Laser Address Selection 3-147


Once you have selected a foot, enter a number corresponding to the proposed
move for that foot. For vertical moves, upward is positive and downward is negative.
For horizontal moves, left is positive and right is negative. The range of values that
can be entered is -1000 to 1000 mils or -25.4 to 25.4 mm.

Enter key
Use the Enter key to advance to the Prediction screen.

Horizontal Prediction Screen

The Prediction screen, allows you to view the estimated alignment condition if the
moves you specified were to be performed. The alignment condition is displayed
just below the machine graphics. Depending on the tolerance type defined for the
job and the analyzer units, alignment angle data will be either in mils/inch or mil-
liradian (mrad) while offset data will be either in mils or millimeters (mm).
The bull’s-eye target displayed in the lower section of the screen indicates how close
the machine vertical or horizontal positions are to being in tolerance. Refer to the
Tolerances section on page 3-193 for more information.

3-148 Horizontal Alignment


Prediction Function Keys

Repeat Predict Mode


Use the Repeat Predict Mode key to return to the Predict Mode screen. It may be
necessary to repeat the process before a suitable solution is found that will bring the
alignment condition within tolerance.

Predict Vertical
Use the Predict Vertical key to advance to the Predict Mode Vertical screen. This
option is available only from the Horizontal Prediction screen.

Predict Horizontal
Use the Predict Horizontal key to advance to the Predict Mode Horizontal screen.
This option is available only from the Vertical Prediction screen.

Go to Machine Moves
Use the Go to Machine Moves key to advance back to the move screen this option
was accessed from.

Live Move
The Live Move option allows you to observe machine movement while making
machine moves. The Live Move option is initiated by pressing the Live Move key on
the machine move screens. If the Live Move option on the Alt Main screen is set to
Horizontal Only, the Live Move key is not active on the Vertical Move screen. Refer
to the Job Flow section on page 3-42 for more information.

Note
Both laser heads need to be turned on for this option to function
properly.

When the Live Move key is pressed, a message will be displayed prompting you to
position the laser heads before starting the live move. If you answer yes, then the live
move operation begins. If you answer no, then the operation is aborted.

Laser Address Selection 3-149


Note
If a live move has been done in say the vertical direction, and fol-
lowing this you then go directly to the Horizontal Move screen (or
visa versa) and try to start the live move there, a warning message will
be displayed to inform you that a live move may have been done since
alignment data was last acquired. Once a live move is done in either
the vertical or horizontal direction, a second live move should not be
done in the perpendicular direction without first acquiring a new set
of laser readings. If you answer yes, then you will continue with the live
move. If you answer no, then the operation is aborted. This same mes-
sage is also displayed on an activated alignment job if a new set of data
has not been acquired since the job was activated.

Selecting the Live Move option from the Vertical Move screen displays the Vertical
Live Move screen. This screen displays the movement required to align the
machine vertically. The target indicates how close the machine vertical position is
to being in tolerance.

3-150 Horizontal Alignment


The Vertical Live Move screen functions similarly to the Horizontal Live Move screen
described below.

Horizontal Live Move Screen

Selecting the Live Move option from the Horizontal Move screen displays the Hor-
izontal Live Move screen. This screen displays the movement required to align the
machine horizontally. The target indicates how close the machine horizontal posi-
tion is to being in tolerance.
The live move can be performed with the laser heads at any rotational position. The
average laser head angle position is displayed in the middle of the screen. The back-
ground will be white if the laser heads are not within 5° of each other and green
when the laser heads are within 5° of each other.

Caution!
Do not change the position of the laser heads after the live move has been started.
Changing the positions of the laser heads after starting the live move will cause
the move to be incorrect.

Laser Address Selection 3-151


Caution!
Do not loosen the machine feet hold down bolts until after the live move has been
started. Loosening the hold down bolts prior to starting the live move can cause
the move to be incorrect.

The amount of movement at the machine feet (expressed in either mils or millime-
ters (mm), depending on the analyzer units) is displayed in the upper section of
the screen. If the movement is positive (to the left — viewed from the outboard end
of the right machine looking towards the left machine) it displays below the
machine. If the movement is negative (to the right — viewed from the outboard end
of the right machine looking towards the left machine) it displays above the
machine. In addition to the amount of movement, an arrow representing the
direction of movement is also displayed at the machine feet where machine moves
are to be made.
As the machine is moved, the bull’s-eye target displayed in the lower section of the
screen provides a continuous update of the alignment condition with respect to teh
tolerance values defined for the job. If the tolerance condition is greater than 2
times the acceptable tolerance, then the outer band will be red. If the tolerance
condition is 1 to 2 times the acceptable tolerance, then the middle band will be
yellow. If the tolerance condition is less than the acceptable tolerance, but greater
than the excellent tolerance, then the center band (bull’s-eye) will be green. If the
tolerance condition is less than the excellent tolerance, then the center band will
have a black star displayed in it. Refer to the Tolerances section on page 3-193 for
more information.
When the Enable Alert option is enabled, the analyzer LED will flash during the live
move when the machine alignment condition reaches the target tolerance values.
Increasing and decreasing flash rates indicate when the machine alignment crosses
through the acceptable and excellent tolerance condition thresholds described
above. The number of flashes and flash rate will be consistent with the audible tone
generated when the machine alignment condition reaches the target tolerance
values. Refer to the Job Flow section on page 3-42 for more information.

3-152 Horizontal Alignment


If the Status Beeper option located under the 2130 analyzer’s Home/General
Setup screen is enabled and the Enable Alert option is enabled, the audible tone
will be generated as described above, but if the Status Beeper option located under
the 2130 analyzer’s Home/General Setup screen is disabled and the Enable Alert
option is enabled, the audible tone will not be generated as described above. In this
case only the analyzer LED will flash as described above.
When the Enable Alert option is disabled, the analyzer LED will not flash and an
audible tone will not be generated when the machine alignment condition reaches
the target tolerance values.
The alignment condition of the machine with respect to the machine components
defined for the job is displayed in the upper section of the screen while the align-
ment condition of the machine with respect to the machine centerlines (repre-
sented by dashed lines) is displayed in the lower section of the screen. In addition
to the machine centerlines, the acceptable angular tolerance band (represented by
an angle bracket) and offset tolerance band (represented by a square bracket) are
also displayed in the lower section of the screen.

Start key
Use the Start key to start the live move after the laser heads are in the chosen rota-
tional position. The Enter key can be used to do the same.

Laser Address Selection 3-153


Left and Right Arrow and Alternate Move keys
Use the Left and Right Arrow and Alternate Move keys to toggle the machine move
sets between the alternate pairs of feet.

Alignment condition is greater than 2 times the acceptable tolerance

3-154 Horizontal Alignment


Once the live move has been started loosen the machine feet hold down bolts then
move the machine(s) until they are within tolerance.

Alignment condition is 1 to 2 times the acceptable tolerance

Laser Address Selection 3-155


Alignment condition is less than the acceptable tolerance, but greater than the excellent
tolerance

3-156 Horizontal Alignment


Alignment condition is less than the excellent tolerance

Stop key
Use the Stop key to stop the live move session once the machine(s) are within tol-
erance, and to advance back to the move screen this option was accessed from. The
Enter key can be used to do the same.

Caution!
When the machine(s) are within tolerance, before exiting the live move, tighten
the machine hold down bolts. If the machine(s) remain within tolerance when
the hold down bolts are tightened, then you can exit the Live Move option.

Caution!
Do not use a hammer to move machines. These impacts may move either sensor
head, causing improper machine positioning. Emerson recommends that you
use jack bolts (permanent or portable).

Laser Address Selection 3-157


Caution!
On completion of a live move, always acquire a new set of alignment data to
verify and finalize the machine’s alignment condition.

3-158 Horizontal Alignment


Caution!
Never rely on a live machine move for the final alignment condition of the
machine. Since there is always some variability introduced into the alignment
data due to shaft clearances, bearing faults, base deterioration, etc. Refer to the
Data Quality section on page 3-127 for more information.

Dual Live Move Screen (machine view)

Laser Address Selection 3-159


Dual Live Move Screen (centerline view)

Selecting the Live Move option from the Dual Move screen displays the Dual Live
Move screen. This screen displays the movement required to align the machine ver-
tically and horizontally at the same time.
When viewing the alignment condition of the machine with respect to the machine
centerlines, the amount of movement and direction of movement (represented by
arrows) are displayed at the machine feet where machine moves are to be made
while black squares are displayed at the machine feet where machine moves will not
to be made.

Note
If the Live Move option on the Alt Main screen is set to Horizontal
Only, then the live move can only be performed in the horizontal
direction. Refer to the Job Flow section on page 3-42 for more infor-
mation.

3-160 Horizontal Alignment


Show Center Lines key
Use the Show Center Lines key to view the alignment condition of the machine
with respect to the machine centerlines. This key is only active when the Live Move
option on the Alt Main screen is set to Vertical and Horizontal.

Show Machine key


Use the Show Machine key to view the alignment condition of the machine with
respect to the machine components defined for the job.

Laser Address Selection 3-161


Data Detail (Tolerance Plots)
From the Data Detail (Tolerance Plot) screens you can review the graphical repre-
sentation of the alignment condition. In addition, if the data was acquired using the
Auto Sweep, Dual Pass, or Manual Sweep methods you can manually condition or
edit the sine curve data using the edit data function. Refer to the Display Sine Fit
section on page 3-168 for more information. The tolerance plot screens are
reached by pressing the Data Detail key on the machine move screens. This option
is available only when alignment data is stored on the job.

Quad Tolerance Plot

On the four quadrant tolerance plot screen, if the Tolerance Type is Standard,
alignment angle versus offset data is plotted for both the vertical and horizontal
directions. If the Tolerance Type is Jackshaft, left machine angular misalignment
versus right machine angular misalignment data is plotted. In this plot, the positive
and negative values for the reading sets are plotted.

3-162 Horizontal Alignment


Dual Tolerance Plot

On the dual tolerance plot screen, the alignment data is plotted similarly to the four
quadrant tolerance plot, except in this case the absolute value of each of the read-
ings is plotted.

Laser Address Selection 3-163


Single Tolerance Plot (Vertical)

Single Tolerance Plot (Horizontal)

On the single tolerance plot screens, alignment data is plotted similarly to the dual
tolerance plot, except in this case the data plotted is either for the vertical or hori-
zontal direction only.

3-164 Horizontal Alignment


For all plot types
• Alignment reading sets will be plotted on the x-y graph with lines connecting each
of the data points for a given direction. Vertical data points display in blue while hor-
izontal data points display in red.
• Depending on the tolerance type defined for the job and the analyzer units, align-
ment angle data will be either in mils/inch or milliradian (mrad) while offset data
will be either in mils or millimeters (mm).
• The area under the lowest arc is the excellent range. The area under the higher arc
and above the lower arc represents the acceptable range. Refer to the Tolerances
section on page 3-193 for more information.
• When the cursor is active, the calculated alignment data values for the selected
point are displayed at the bottom of the screen.
• The RPM defined for the job is displayed just to the right of the calculated align-
ment data values.

Up and Down Arrow keys


Use the Up and Down Arrow keys to expand and compress (contract) the Y Axis
by a factor of two.

Left and Right Arrow keys


Use the Left and Right Arrow keys to move the cursor between the data points.

Enter key
Use the Enter key to return to the screen from which this option was selected.

Laser Address Selection 3-165


Data Detail (Tolerance Plot) Function Keys

Display Sine Fit


Use the Display Sine Fit key to advance to the sine fit data plot where you can review
and manually condition or edit the sine curve data. This key is only active if the data
was acquired using the Auto Sweep, Dual Pass, or Manual Sweep methods. Refer to
the Display Sine Fit section on page 3-168 for more information.

View Data
Use the View Data key to advance to the View Data screen where you can review the
alignment data in the traditional cardinal positions (0°, 90°, 180°, and 270°). Refer
to the View Data section on page 3-174 for more information.

Full Screen
Use the Full Screen key to display the plot in “full” screen mode. In full screen
mode, the soft keys disappear and only function to return the display back to its
original size.

Switch Plot Type


Use the Switch Plot Type key to toggle the plot type between the Four Quadrant
Tolerance plot, Dual Tolerance plot, Single Vertical Tolerance plot, and Single
Horizontal Tolerance plot.

Show All
Use the Show All key to display all readings acquired. This key is only active when
more than three readings are stored on the job and only the last three readings
acquired are displayed.

Show Last 3
Use the Show Last 3 key to display only the last three readings acquired. This key is
only active when more than three readings are stored on the job and all readings
acquired are displayed.

Expand X Axis
Use the Expand X Axis key to expand the X Axis by a factor of two.

Compress X Axis
Use the Compress X Axis key to compress (contract) the X Axis by a factor of two.

3-166 Horizontal Alignment


Cursor Home
Use the Cursor Home key to advance the cursor to the “Home” or newest data
point displayed. In this case, this is the last data point acquired.

Clear Cursor
Use the Clear Cursor key to deactivate (clear) the cursor from the plot. This key is
only active when a cursor is active.

Cursor End
Use the Cursor End key to advance the cursor to the “End” or oldest data point dis-
played.

Laser Address Selection 3-167


Display Sine Fit
From the Sine Fit (Sine Curve Data) plot screen you can review and manually con-
dition or edit the sine curve data. This screen is reached by pressing the Display
Sine Fit key on the tolerance plot screens. This option is available only when the
alignment data was acquired using the Auto Sweep, Dual Pass, or Manual Sweep
methods.

Sine Curve Data Screen

On the sine curve data plot screen, amplitude versus degree data is plotted on the x-y graph.
Amplitude data units will be either in mils or millimeters (mm), depending on the analyzer
units. Active (undeleted) data points (displayed as green triangles are included in the fit cal-
culation while deleted data points (displayed as red diamonds) are excluded from the fit cal-
culation. In addition to the points, the calculated sine curve is displayed.
When a cursor is active, the following alignment data values for the selected point
are displayed just below the plot:

3-168 Horizontal Alignment


• Point
This variable indicates the number of the selected point.
• Angle
This variable indicates the angular position (in degrees) of the selected point.
• Vert
This variable indicates the actual vertical position (in mils or mm, depending on
the analyzer units) of the selected point. The background for this variable will be
green for an active point and red for a deleted point.
• Est
This variable is the amplitude value of the sine fit curve at the particular angular
position.

Note
Although up to 180 data points can be acquired, not all the data
points are required for the fit calculation. However, a minimum of
three points is required to fit the data to the sine curve.

The following calculated sine curve variables are displayed at the bottom of the
screen:
• Phase
This variable indicates (in degrees) where the plus zero transition is positioned.
• Offset
This variable indicates (in mils or mm, depending on the analyzer units) the cen-
terline of the laser travel on the target in the radial direction. The initial position of
the laser on the target affects this variable.
• Amplitude
This variable indicates the maximum displacement (in mils or mm, depending on
the analyzer units) of the sine curve from the offset line.
• Correlation
This variable indicates the confidence factor (shown as a percentage) used to deter-
mine the quality of the sine curve data. In other words, it indicates how well the
points fit the sine curve.

Laser Address Selection 3-169


Emerson does not recommend making moves based on sine fit percentages of less
than 70%. Although sine fits less than 70% can be used, Emerson recommends
another set of readings be made to try and improve the accuracy. Sine fits above
90% provide the highest repeatability.

Calculated Sine Curve Diagram

Up and Down Arrow keys


Use the Up and Down Arrow keys to expand and compress (contract) the Y Axis
by a factor of two.

Left and Right Arrow keys


Use the Left and Right Arrow keys to move the cursor between the data points.

Enter key
Use the Enter key to return to the screen from which this option was selected.

3-170 Horizontal Alignment


Sine Curve Shape
The sine curve for each machine is used to determine the alignment condition of
the machines and the quality of the acquired data. The lower the curve fit per-
centage is during an alignment job the more of a problem and difficult, if not
impossible, it can become to complete the alignment job. When a low curve fit per-
centage occurs, the process of determining its cause needs to begin. The best place
to start is to look at the sine fit curve.
If the data points appear grouped in straight horizontal rows configured in a stair
step pattern the acquired data is possibly bad. Make sure that both laser heads are
mounted properly on the shaft of each machine, check the coupling, and acquire
new data. When the only place to mount the laser heads is on a flexible type cou-
pling, make sure the laser heads are mounted on sections of the coupling that flex
independently of each other. If the coupling is a rigid coupling, whether you
mount the laser heads on the shafts or the coupling, the coupling must be removed
or broken loose.
If the machines are connected by a jackshaft, spool, or spacer coupling do not
mount the laser heads on the center section of the coupling. Mounting the laser
heads on the same section of a flexible coupling, on machines connected by a rigid
coupling, or on the center section of a jackshaft is like mounting the laser heads on
a straight piece of rigid pipe. In this case, the stair step pattern is the result of no mis-
alignment being present. A small amount of sag in the pipe and a low variability
level due to something other than misalignment may appear as misalignment. For
this reason, placing the laser heads on a straight piece of rigid pipe to check them
is not recommended.
If the laser heads are mounted correctly and the data still appears grouped in the
stair step pattern, check the status of the laser heads for a possible hardware
problem.
Although the 8215/8225 laser fixtures are designed to be rotated a full revolution
in two seconds, make sure to use a smooth, uniform acceleration and deceleration
during the rotation for accurate, reliable, and repeatable data. Also, make sure no
obstacles are blocking the laser beam during the rotation and make sure both
beams remain in the targets for at least 45° of the rotation of the laser heads.
Emerson recommends you sweep at least 90°; however accuracy still may be
reduced even at 90°.
If the laser heads are being swept correctly check the status of the laser heads for a
possible hardware problem.

Laser Address Selection 3-171


If enough data points were acquired, but they are displayed in a randomly scattered
pattern across the screen the measured misalignment amplitudes will decrease
while the ratio of noise to the signal increases. In this case, problems (e.g. a bearing
fault, a loose coupling, a rub, etc.) can distort the sine fit curve. This is the most
common reason for unfit sine fit curves. When this occurs, check the amplitudes of
each curve and edit the unfit sine fit curve to make it fit or change to the four point
method and acquire new data.
The peak-peak amplitudes of each sine fit curve can be used to determine whether
the laser heads are mounted on the shafts properly or if the machines are aligned.
If the amplitudes of both machines are around two mils or less and three or more
data points were acquired in a sweep arc of 45° or more the machines might pos-
sibly be aligned within tolerance. When this condition exists, the accuracy of any
further adjustments may be reduced using the available data.
If the peak-peak amplitudes of the sine fit curves are too high, check the sine fit
curve for data points which might lie far away from the sine fit curve and either edit
the sine fit and remove the measurement points which might lie far away from the
curve or change to a four point method and acquire new data. Another possible
reason for this condition could be the presence of too much looseness in the
system. To verify this condition, it will be necessary to check the system for looseness
and then repeat the measurement.

Display Sine Fit Function Keys

Delete/Undelete Point
Use the Delete/Undelete Point key to delete or undelete the selected point. The
point is not actually deleted from the data set, but it is marked (or unmarked) so
that it is not used when the program fits a sine wave to the data points. A deleted
point is not used in the fit calculation. Whenever points are deleted or undeleted
the fit is recalculated. A minimum of three points is required for the fit calculation.

Full Screen
Use the Full Screen key to display the plot in “full” screen mode. In full screen
mode, the soft keys disappear and only function to return the display back to its
original size.

3-172 Horizontal Alignment


Chng Active Plot
Use the Chng Active Plot key to change the active plot (marked with a red box
around it). When most of the functions, available on this screen, are selected they
are applied to the active plot.

Switch Plot Type


Use the Switch Plot Type key to toggle the plot type between the left and right laser
head data plots together, the left laser head data plot only, or the right laser head
data plot only.

Undelete All Points


Use the Undelete All Points key to undelete all data points and redo the calcula-
tions for the machine. This will cause all data points to be used in the curve fit cal-
culations.

Expand X Axis
Use the Expand X Axis key to expand the X Axis by a factor of two.

Compress X Axis
Use the Compress X Axis key to compress (contract) the X Axis by a factor of two.

Cursor Home
Use the Cursor Home key to advance the cursor to the “Home” or lowest angle
value.

Clear Cursor
Use the Clear Cursor key to deactivate (clear) the cursor from the plot.

Cursor End
Use the Cursor End key to advance the cursor to the “End” or highest angle value.

Laser Address Selection 3-173


View Data
From the View Data screen you can review the alignment data in the traditional car-
dinal positions (0°, 90°, 180°, and 270°). The View Data screen is reached by
pressing the View Data key on the tolerance plot screens.

View Data Screen

This data cannot be edited and is simply provided for the convenience of those who
are accustomed to recording the data in this manner or who wish to use this data
to perform a graphical solution on paper.

Zero Top Reading Key


Use the Zero Top Reading key, to zero the top reading. If the top reading for both
machines is zero (such as the case would be if the saved reading set was the aver-
aged result from multiple acquisitions) this key is not available.

3-174 Horizontal Alignment


Display Actual Data key
Use the Display Actual Data key, to see the “raw data,” (the position of the beam on
each target). If the top reading for both machines is zero (such as the case would
be if the saved reading set was the averaged result from multiple acquisitions) this
key is not available.

Enter key
Use the Enter key, to return to the tolerance plot screens.

C-face Alignment
After alignment data is acquired, the C-face option can be used to display align-
ment data for machines in which the machine moves are done on a machine with
a circular flange with a basic four bolt pattern. If the setup for a rectangular or
custom flange pattern is required you will need to change the job to a Vertical align-
ment job. Refer to the Vertical Alignment section on page 4-1 for more informa-
tion.

Laser Address Selection 3-175


This option is available by selecting the Align C-face Machine option after viewing
the tolerance plot(s) for a Quick Spec job. Refer to the Quick Spec section on page
3-53 for more information.

C-Face setup screen

The C-face Setup screen allows you to enter the dimensions for the flange location
where moves are to be made.

Note
This section assumes that the fixtures are set up to the point that the
laser heads are mounted.

Dimensions can be expressed in either inches or millimeters (mm), depending on


the analyzer units. All dimensions must be entered before continuing. The range
of values that can be entered for the A dimension is -3600 to 3600 inches or -91440
to 91440 mm. The range of values that can be entered for the Y dimension is 1.0 to
1000 inches or 25.4 to 25400 mm. The Y Dimension default is 1 inch (25.4 mm).

3-176 Horizontal Alignment


When entering any of the machine dimensions, the flange dimensions should be
measured and extended to the nearest 1/8 inch (3 mm). Refer to the Entering
Fractions section on page 3-51 for information about entering fractions.

Up, Down, Left, and Right Arrow keys


Use the Up, Down, Left, and Right Arrow keys to select the field you want to modify
(highlighted with the red box around it).

Enter key
Use the Enter key to advance to the C-face Solution screen.
Refer to the following table for a description of each dimension.

Laser Address Selection 3-177


Measure
Dimension Measurement Description to the
Nearest

Center of flange to be moved to the laser head face on the upper


1/8 inch
A machine. To enter a measurement for a flange that falls inside
(3 mm)
the laser face, place a negative sign (–) in front of it.

1/8 inch
Y The bolt pattern diameter.
(3 mm)

C-face Solution Screen

The C-face Solution screen allows you to view the alignment condition and
machine moves for the machine being aligned.

3-178 Horizontal Alignment


The alignment condition is displayed just below the machine graphics. Depending
on the analyzer units, since the tolerance type can only be Standard when per-
forming a C-face alignment the alignment angle data displayed will be in mils/inch
or milliradian (mrad) while offset data displayed will be in mils or millimeters
(mm).
The bull’s-eye target displayed just below the coupling represents the alignment
condition with respect to the tolerances defined for the job. If the tolerance condi-
tion is greater than 2 times the acceptable tolerance, then the outer band will be
red. If the tolerance condition is 1 to 2 times the acceptable tolerance, then the
middle band will be yellow. If the tolerance condition is less than the acceptable tol-
erance, but greater than the excellent tolerance, then the center band (bull’s-eye)
will be green. If the tolerance condition is less than the excellent tolerance, then the
center band will have a black star displayed in it. Refer to the Tolerances section on
page 3-193 for more information.
The amount of movement required to align the machine (expressed in either mils
or millimeters (mm), depending on the analyzer units) is displayed just to the right
of the flange. A graphical representation of the movement (represented by the
dual arrows) is displayed in the center of the flange.
Shim values are equivalent to raising the machine. In this case, all shim values will
be positive. When correcting angular misalignment keep the flange offset move-
ment to a minimum. After shimming is complete, be sure to re-tighten bolts and
take a new set of readings.

C-face Setup key


Use the C-face Setup key to return to the C-face Setup screen.

Enter key
Use the Enter key to advance to the Main screen.

Laser Address Selection 3-179


Notes
From the Notes screen notes can be assigned to the current job. In addition to pre-
defined notes user defined notes can also be created and assigned to the current
job from under this option. The Notes screen is reached by pressing the Notes key
on the Alt Main screen.

Defined Notes Screen

Except for the difference in the groups of predefined notes available, this option
functions exactly as it does in the existing 2130 analyzer programs.

Notes Function Keys

Next Group
Use the Next Group key to display the next group of predefined notes.

3-180 Horizontal Alignment


User Defined Notes
Use the User Defined Notes key to advance to the User Defined Notes screen
where you can then select a user defined note from that list. If you have no user
defined notes, you can use this screen in order to create them. Select Create User
Note, type in the note (32 characters maximum), and then press the Enter key to
create the note and add it to the list. You are allowed a maximum of 25 user defined
notes. If the maximum of 25 stored notes is reached, the analyzer forces you to
delete a note before you can add a new note.

User Defined Notes Screen

Laser Address Selection 3-181


Add to Job
Use the Add to Job key to add the highlighted note to the job. Notes allow you to
record specific comments about the equipment that you might not be able to
remember later. You can record observations about the equipment that you are
monitoring. Once you have added the note to the job, it is saved and dumped into
your UltraMgr database with the job. You can add up to 40 predefined and user
defined notes to any 2130 analyzer alignment job. If the maximum of 40 stored
notes is reached, the analyzer forces you to delete a note before you can add a new
note.

Notes Screen with Assigned Notes

Remove from Job


Use the Remove from Job key to remove the highlighted note from the assigned
notes list. When this option is selected, the highlighted note is removed without any
warning.

Clear All Notes


Use the Clear All Notes key to clear all the notes you have assigned to the job. When
this option is selected, notes are cleared without any warning.

3-182 Horizontal Alignment


Prev Group
Use the Prev Group key to display the previous group of predefined notes.

Defined Notes
Use the Defined Notes key to advance to the predefined Notes screen where you
can then select a predefined note from that list. Some predefined notes will use the
machine names defined for the job. For example, if “Fixed” and “Move” were
selected to be the machines names for the job, the Soft Foot related notes would
contain these machine names (as shown above in the first Notes screen).

Delete User Note


Use the Delete User Note key to delete the highlighted note from the User Defined
Notes list. Before any note is deleted, a warning message will be displayed asking
you if this is truly the operation to be performed. If you answer yes, then the note
will be deleted from the list. If you answer no, then the operation is aborted.

Defined and User Defined Notes Up and Down Arrows


Use the Defined and User Defined Notes Up and Down Arrow keys to scroll
through the list of predefined and user defined notes.

Assigned Notes Up and Down Arrows


Use the Assigned Notes Up and Down Arrow keys to scroll through the list of notes
assigned to the job.

Note
Predefined notes can not be modified and user defined notes stay
stored in memory until deleted. Notes stored in analyzer memory are
not removed when alignment jobs are deleted.

Note
Whenever a note is added or removed from a job, the number of
notes attached to the job, displayed in the upper section of the main
screen, is updated.

Laser Address Selection 3-183


Transferring Alignment Job Data and Tolerances
The option to transfer alignment jobs and tolerances is only available in the
Advanced Laser Align program. Alignment jobs can be transferred to and from the
Personal Computer (PC) while alignment tolerances can only be transferred from
the PC to the analyzer.

Note
The option to transfer alignment jobs and tolerances is not available
in the Basic Laser Align program.

Communications between the analyzer and host computer (PC) or network can be
achieved through an Ethernet card and cable, a USB cable, or a CSI serial commu-
nications cable. The fastest way of transferring data is via the Ethernet connection
and the slowest way is via the CSI serial communications cable. The most common
and easiest connection however is via the USB.
Connection to a host computer or network requires the Advanced Laser Align pro-
gram’s Connect for Transfer option and the Machinery Health Manager’s
RBMcom program. When transferring alignment jobs and tolerances between the
PC and analyzer, both the PC and the analyzer can act as either the master or slave.
This means either one can control the transaction between the two.

3-184 Horizontal Alignment


Connect for Transfer
The Connect for Transfer option is available from the Job Manager screen.

PC Communications Screen

When the Connect for Transfer option is selected the PC Communications screen
is displayed. From this screen you can select between loading alignment jobs from
the PC, dumping alignment jobs to the PC, and loading an alignment tolerance
table from the PC.

Note
Machinery Health Manager must have the alignment technology
enabled in order to transfer alignment jobs and tolerances between
the PC and analyzer. If this technology isn’t enabled, a warning mes-
sage will be displayed when the Connect for Transfer option is
selected.

Laser Address Selection 3-185


Note
RBMcom must be launched before the Connect for Transfer option
is selected. If it hasn’t been launched, a warning message displays
when the Connect for Transfer option is selected.

Set Storage Location, Load Jobs, and Dump Data keys


Refer to the RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer section of the
Model 2130 analyzer Machinery Analyzer User’s Guide (P/N 97017) and
Machinery Health Manager’s RBMcom Help file for information about con-
necting to a host computer or network in order to set the storage location, to load
alignment jobs, or dump alignment jobs since these options function similarly for
all Model 2130 programs.

3-186 Horizontal Alignment


Load Tolerance Table key
Use the Load Tolerance Table key to load an alignment tolerance table from the
PC into the analyzer without loading an alignment job. The alignment tolerance
table contains the tolerance values for standard, jackshaft, and vertical alignment
jobs, as well as soft foot and FDI tolerance values. Refer to the Tolerances section on
page 3-193 for more information about tolerances.

Select Database Screen

When the Load Tolerance Table option is selected the Select Database screen is dis-
played. From this screen you can select the Machinery Health Manager database
from which the alignment tolerance table is to be loaded.

Laser Address Selection 3-187


Load Tolerance Table key
Use the Load Tolerance Table key to load the default tolerance table for the
selected (highlighted) database into the analyzer. After the new set of alignment
tolerance values are loaded into the analyzer's memory, any new job created from
that point will use the new set of alignment tolerance values. Any job stored in ana-
lyzer memory prior to loading the new set of alignment tolerance values into active
memory will use the alignment tolerance value for the setup it was originally stored
with. If the job stored in analyzer memory prior to loading the new set of alignment
tolerance values into active memory is modified in a way that requires a new align-
ment tolerance value (e.g. changing the RPM, or changing the coupling tolerance
type from Jackshaft to Standard) the new alignment tolerance value will come from
the new set of alignment tolerance values loaded into active memory.

Note
In Machinery Health Manager, the same recommended alignment
tolerance values used as defaults in the analyzer are used as the data-
base's default alignment tolerance values until changed by the user.
The Load Defaults option on the Alt Main screen can be used to
delete any alignment tolerance values loaded into the analyzer from
the PC. In this case, the default alignment tolerance values will be
reactivated.

Database Up and Down Arrows


Use the Database Up and Down Arrow keys to scroll through the list of databases.

3-188 Horizontal Alignment


RBMcom
Since most of the options available in RBMcom function similarly for all Model
2130 analyzer programs refer to the RBMcom and Other Communications with
the Analyzer section of the Model 2130 Machinery Analyzer User’s Guide (P/N
97017) and Machinery Health Manager’s RBMcom Help file for additional infor-
mation.

RBMcom

Laser Address Selection 3-189


Before any alignment jobs and the alignment tolerance table option will show up
in the tree, the Show Alignment Jobs option under the User Preferences General
tab must be selected (checked).

User Preferences

Note
The analyzer must have the Advanced Laser Align program enabled
in order to transfer alignment jobs and tolerances between the PC
and analyzer. If this program isn’t enabled, a warning message will be
displayed when you try to transfer the job to the analyzer.

Note
The analyzer must be connected to RBMcom in order to transfer
alignment jobs and tolerances between the PC and analyzer. If it isn’t
connected, you will not be able to transfer alignment jobs and toler-
ances.

3-190 Horizontal Alignment


The options for transferring alignment jobs from the analyzer to the computer are
handled in the same manner supported for other transferable entities (e.g. routes
and jobs). That includes the ability to transfer jobs via drag and drop or using the
“Data Dump” button option.
• Using the mouse, left-click on the job (located on the right-side window pane)
which you want to transfer from the analyzer to the computer database or folder.
Once the job has been selected (highlighted) use the Data Dump button to
transfer the selected job.
• Using the mouse, left-click and hold on the job on the right-side window pane you
want to transfer from the analyzer to the computer database or folder. Then while
still holding, drag the selected job from the right-side window pane to the left-side
window pane.
If more than one database is available in RBMcom, a database list dialog box dis-
plays prompting for a selection of the database to which the jobs are to be trans-
ferred. When this occurs, select the database you want to transfer the job to.
If a job with the exact same date and time exists in the storage location (unassigned
or assigned), the job will be stored as a new job as long as the job number is dif-
ferent. If a job with the same job number, but a different date time exists in the
storage location, the job will be stored as a new job. If a job with the exact same date
and job number exists, then an error will be displayed and the job will not be
uploaded.
Jobs that originate in the analyzer will be stored in the unassigned area of the data-
base. A job that originate from a download of an existing job from a database will
retain its source location so when it is transferred back to the computer, it will be
saved directly under the same equipment it originated from. If the equipment indi-
cated can not be found in the database (e.g. the equipment was deleted or a dif-
ferent database has been chosen), then you will receive a warning and the job will
be stored in the unassigned area of the database.

Note
Modifications in the analyzer to the coupling type, machine ID or
Description, machine dimensions between the feet, the machine
view or configuration, RPM or station information, will cause the
2130 Laser Alignment program to set the job type to “unassigned”.

Laser Address Selection 3-191


The options for transferring alignment jobs and the alignment tolerance table to
the analyzer from the computer are done in the same manner supported for other
transferable entities (e.g. routes and jobs). That includes the ability to transfer jobs
and the alignment tolerance table via drag and drop or using the “Data Load”
button option.
• Using the mouse, left-click on the job located on the left-side window pane you want
to transfer to the analyzer from the computer database or folder. Once the job has
been selected (highlighted) use the Data Load button to transfer the selected job.
• Using the mouse, left-click and hold on the job on the left-side window pane which
you want to transfer to the analyzer from the computer database or folder. Then
while still holding, drag the selected job from the left-side window pane to the right-
side window pane.
To load a particular alignment tolerance table into the analyzer from the computer,
select (highlight) the alignment tolerance table option for the database from
which you want to transfer the table.

Note
The alignment tolerances will be selectable at the database level in the
left pane database view. The tolerances will be displayed as a set con-
taining the defined default tolerance settings for all tolerance types
supported.

After the new set of alignment tolerance values are loaded into the analyzer's
memory, any new job created from that point will use the new set of alignment tol-
erance values. Any job stored in analyzer memory prior to loading the new set of
alignment tolerance values into active memory will use the alignment tolerance
value for the setup it was originally stored with. If the job stored in analyzer memory
prior to loading the new set of alignment tolerance values into active memory is
modified in a way that requires a new alignment tolerance value (e.g. changing the
RPM, or changing the coupling tolerance type from Jackshaft to Standard) the new
alignment tolerance value will come from the new set of alignment tolerance values
loaded into active memory. Refer to the Tolerances section on page 3-193 for more
information about tolerances.

3-192 Horizontal Alignment


Note
In Machinery Health Manager, the same recommended alignment
tolerance values used as defaults in the analyzer are used as the data-
base's default alignment tolerance values until changed by the user.
The Load Defaults option on the Alt Main screen can be used to
delete any alignment tolerance values loaded into the analyzer from
the PC. In this case, the default alignment tolerance values will be
reactivated.

Note
Before any jobs are transferred, a confirmation message will be dis-
played asking you to verify the location where the selected jobs are to
be transferred to. If you answer yes, then the selected jobs and any
data stored on these jobs will be transferred to the selected database.
If you answer no, then the operation is aborted.

Note
Press and hold the Shift and Control keys on the computer keyboard
to select several jobs at once for transfer.

Tolerances
The amount of offset and angular misalignment displayed is based on the last full
set of alignment readings. All shaft misalignment is a combination of offset and
angular misalignment (see “Alignment Application Notes” on page A-3). This
screen breaks down the misalignment into each component. The amount of each
type of misalignment is shown for both the horizontal and vertical directions (for
horizontal machines). These values are only used for tolerances therefore, only absolute
values are used (no negative signs).

Laser Address Selection 3-193


UltraMgr/2130 Laser Align Overview
The figure below illustrates how jobs can be moved in and out of various areas of
UltraMgr’s database and the analyzer. Definitions of the job types follow.

UltraMgr (PC) - (Master/Slave) Analyzer - (Slave/Master)


UltraMgr Database
Store  Activate
Assigned Job(s) Area

Station: Stored Job(s) Current Job


Area Area
Machine:
Load
Station:
Machine:
001 Motor 001 Motor

Dump
002 Pump

*One job
at a time

Load

 Jobs are stored


Unassigned Job(s) Area Dump automatically

003 Fan
004 Turbine

UltraMgr/Model 2130 analyzer Overview

Note
This manual uses the terms “Station” and “Machine.” In UltraMgr
and in the 2130 Laser Align program, “Station” is referred to as
“Area” and “Machine” is referred to as “Equipment” - unless rede-
fined by the user.

3-194 Horizontal Alignment


Definitions of the four job types illustrated in the UltraMgr/2130 Laser Align figure
are:
• Assigned jobs — jobs that have been assigned to a machine.
• Unassigned jobs — jobs that have been moved from the Stored Jobs area of
the analyzer into the UltraMgr database but have not been assigned to a
machine. Using UltraMgr, you can also change a job from Assigned to Unas-
signed status.
• Stored jobs — located in the Stored Jobs area of the analyzer. Current jobs
that are saved become stored jobs and are placed in the Stored Jobs area;
also, all jobs that are loaded from the UltraMgr database are placed in this
area and become stored jobs.
• Current job — job currently displayed in the working area (only one job can
be displayed at a time).

Case Studies
The following cases may help you to understand how jobs move around in the
analyzer and back and forth to UltraMgr.
When beginning a job (in the Current Job location), there are normally two
choices: start from ground zero and create, configure, and name an entirely new
job or, (if available) activate a job from the Stored Job(s) area.

Case 1
If you create and configure an entirely new job in the analyzer’s Current Job
area and you want to keep it, (using the RBMcom program on a PC), dump it to
the Unassigned Area or directly to a machine and station of UltraMgr.
Dumping the job directly to a machine and station fully integrates the job infor-
mation into the UltraMgr database. If you do not want to assign the job to a
machine and station, you can leave it in the Unassigned Area, or you can unas-
sign it from the machine and station where it was dumped.
In either case, use RBMcom to load the job back into the analyzer and from that
point, you can activate it into the Current Job area where you have full editing
capabilities.

UltraMgr/2130 Laser Align Overview 3-195


Note
You may not be able to edit all fields, depending on the state of the
job.

Case 2
Begin with an activated job from the Stored Job area. If you change a job in the
Current Job area, that change affects the job in the stored job area.

Case 3
This case is referred to as job “cloning” and provides optimum use of the entire
system, including UltraMgr.
Load an old job performed on the same machine into the analyzer and use it as
a template. The old job contains information on job setup, and concerns or
observations (notes). Review this information before clearing old information.
Edit the job setup and then take your first set of new readings, if desired.
With UltraMgr/2130 Laser Align, you can;
• Save time by using a previous job setup.
• See problems and concerns documented on previous jobs.
• New data automatically dumps to the proper location.
This is because jobs that are loaded from the Assigned area of
UltraMgr/2130 Laser Align already have station and machine
assignments.
Both the UltraMgr PC and the Analyzer can act as the master or the slave. This
means that both can control transactions between the UltraMgr PC and the Ana-
lyzer. Refer to the Transferring Alignment Job Data and Tolerances section on
page 3-184 for more information about communications with the Analyzer.
Also, when you are using UltraMgr, you need to consider what actions are necessary
after jobs have been created or changed (in the analyzer). As mentioned previously,
actual Station and Machine assignments are made from UltraMgr.
The following table (next page) illustrates how changes to the various parameters
affect the job type. Although job type is a software term, the job type determines
where the job will be dumped to within the alignment database (to a Machine loca-
tion or to the Unassigned area).

3-196 Horizontal Alignment


Modifications to change the Job Type to
these fields

Unassigned Modified

Alignment Data X

Alignment Method X

Coupling X

Mach Desc X

Mach ID X

Machine Dimension: A & E X


(between feet)

Machine Dimension: B, C, D, & F X

Machine View (also called X


machine configuration)

Notes X

RPM X

Station X

Thermal Growth X

User Initials X

Foot Pre-check X

Laser Configuration X

Modified Jobs — This job type is assigned to a particular machine within UltraMgr.
If a change(s) is made to a job that causes it to become Modified, it will still retain
its Station and Machine assignments in UltraMgr.

UltraMgr/2130 Laser Align Overview 3-197


Unassigned Jobs — If you create a new job or make change(s) to an existing job that
causes it to be Unassigned, when dumped, it will be placed in the Unassigned Area
of the alignment database. From there, you can use UltraMgr to assign it to a
machine within the database.

Note
If, for some reason, you do not want to assign a job to the database,
you always have the option of leaving it in the Unassigned Area.
UltraMgr allows you to Load and Dump these jobs to the analyzer the
same way assigned jobs are handled.

3-198 Horizontal Alignment


UltraMgr
UltraMgr is a versatile, PC-based, database software package that is used to manage
corrective technologies data.
The storage of alignment information in a database provides many advantages
which include:
• The ability to quickly retrieve and review the alignment status of all equip-
ment in an entire plant to help plan the maintenance priorities and sched-
uling.
• The ability to quickly retrieve and review the alignment history of a partic-
ular technician to determine if more training is needed.
• The ability to quickly retrieve and review the alignment history of a partic-
ular piece of equipment to determine if the machine is going out of align-
ment too frequently.
• The ability to use previously entered and stored machine-specific data and
setup information in the present alignment (on the same machine) thereby
greatly reducing setup time.
• The ability to use previously entered and stored machine-specific data and
setup information in the present alignment (on a similar machine), thus
requiring only minor changes in the field.
• The ability to recall the complete alignment job previously performed on
the present machine (including notes) to see peculiarities that might affect
alignment. Knowing about previous problems will reduce time spent tack-
ling the same concerns. Also, the name of the technician that performed
the alignment previously is available in case there are any questions.
UltraMgr can be used as a standalone program or in conjunction with CSI’s AMS™
Suite: Machinery Health™ Manager. The maximum benefits of UltraMgr are
obtained when used with Machinery Health Manager because you can quickly
switch from alignment history to examine vibration data for machines under inves-
tigation.

UltraMgr 3-199
UltraMgr Software and Firmware Prerequisites

Note
Your AMS™ Suite: Machinery Health™ Manager software and
Model 2130 RBMCONSULTANT PRO must have compatible software.

Requirements
Model 2130 RBMCONSULTANT PRO firmware version v.6.3.8.0 or later.
The following, 4.90 or later, AMS™ Suite: Machinery Health™ Manager files -
dated 08/08/2005 or later:
• RBMcom.exe
• RBMcomSr.exe
• XFrAlg.dll
• UltraAlg.exe
UltraMgr requires some planning and setup before jobs can be down-loaded into
this alignment program. Refer to the appropriate UltraMgr user’s manual for more
information on communicating with the PC.
The DOS version and earlier Windows versions of the UltraMgr software will not
work with the 2130 Laser Align program.

3-200 Horizontal Alignment


Tolerances
The amount of offset and angular misalignment displayed is based upon the last
full set of alignment readings. All shaft misalignment is a combination of offset
and angular misalignment (See “Alignment Application Notes” on page A-3.).
This screen breaks down the misalignment into each component. The amount of
each type of misalignment is shown for both the horizontal and vertical direc-
tions (for horizontal machines). These values are only used for tolerances there-
fore, only absolute values are used (no negative signs).

UltraMgr 3-201
Standard
The combination of offset and angle is a direct indication of the alignment condi-
tion. Optimum alignment occurs when offset and angle are zero. In most cases,
that degree of accuracy is not practical. For that reason, tolerances are used to set
an achievable goal. Emerson’s recommended tolerances (referenced to RPMs) are
listed in the table below.

Excellent Acceptable

Speed Angle Offse Angle


Offset
(RPM) (mils/ t (mils/
(mils)
inch) (mils) inch)

< 500 5.0 1.5 6.0 2.0


501 - 1250 4.0 1.0 5.0 1.5
1251 - 3.0 0.5 4.0 1.0
2000
2001 - 2.0 0.3 3.0 0.5
3500
3501 - 1.0 0.25 2.0 0.3
7000
> 7000 .5 0.2 1.0 0.25

English Data Units

3-202 Horizontal Alignment


Excellent Acceptable

Speed Offse
Offset Angle Angle
(RPM) t
(mm) (mrad) (mrad)
(mm)

< 500 0.13 1.5 0.15 2.0


501 - 1250 0.1 1.0 0.13 1.5
1251 - 0.08 0.5 0.1 1.0
2000
2001 - 0.05 0.3 0.08 0.5
3500
3501 - 0.03 0.25 0.05 0.3
7000
> 7000 0.01 0.2 0.03 0.25

Metric Data Units

Values in the table are assumed to be pure offset or pure angle. However, in most
cases, you will have a combination of the two and tolerances should account for this
combination.
For example, for an 1800 RPM machine that has 3.5 mils (0.09mm) of pure offset
misalignment, the alignment is in the acceptable range. Or, if it has 0.80 mils/inch
(0.8mrad) of pure angular misalignment, the alignment is acceptable. However, if
the remaining misalignment is a combination of 3.5 mils offset and 0.80 mils/inch
angular, the misalignment is not as good, and should be considered out-of-toler-
ance.
Plotting the condition as a single point on an X-Y graph provides a true indication
of the alignment status.
The offset and angle information is intended to be used for alignment tolerance
only (to determine how close to tolerance the alignment is based upon the last set
of alignment readings); do not use these data to align the machines. For this
reason, offset and angle are always displayed as positive numbers.

UltraMgr 3-203
The curves at the lower left are the tolerances to shoot for. Depending on RPM,
they can be modified in UltraMgr and then transferred to the analyzer. See
“UltraMgr” on page 3-199 for more information.
The alignment condition (with respect to the tolerances) can be monitored by
observing the tolerance target during the live move. A green bull’s-eye means you
are within the acceptable tolerance range. A yellow middle band means you are 1x -
2x the acceptable tolerance. A red outside band means you are greater than 2x the
acceptable tolerance. A green bull’s-eye with a star means you are within the excel-
lent tolerance range.
1

Tolerance Example

Tolerance Chart (200 to 3500 RPM)

3-204 Horizontal Alignment


The chart above shows the Angle and Offset for a machine that operates at 2000 —
3500 RPM plotted together. A pure angle reading of 0.45 mils/inch (0.44 mrad)
and a pure Offset reading of 2.5 mils (0.06 mm) are marked by the arrows. These
readings are clearly in the acceptable range when looked at individually. However,
look what happens when these two “acceptable” reading are plotted together. The
two lines connect outside the acceptable range. This illustrates the importance of
looking at the Offset and Angle together when establishing specified tolerances.

Jackshaft
One of the biggest advantages in using a laser system is the ability to align over long
distances (> 20 inches or 508 mm). The further apart the sensor heads are
mounted, the less practical it is to use the Offset and Angle Tolerances. In those
cases, the Jackshaft Tolerances should be used. This method measures the two
angles (α and ß) as shown in the figure below. The combination of these two angles
are laid out on a graph similar to the offset and angle graphic. When the angles are
within tolerance, the cursor will be in the Excellent or Acceptable range.

UltraMgr 3-205
Emerson’s recommended tolerances are listed in the following table.

Excellent Acceptable

Speed Angle Angle


(RPM) (mils/inch or (mils/inch or
mrad) mrad)

< 500 1.0 2.0


501 - 1250 0.9 1.8
1251 - 2000 0.8 1.6
2001 - 3500 0.6 1.2
3501 - 7000 0.4 0.6
> 7000 0.2 0.3

3-206 Horizontal Alignment


Chapter 4

Vertical Alignment

The vertical alignment feature of the Advanced Laser Align application is used to
collect and display alignment data for machines in which the machine moves are
done at the machine flange (e.g. C-face mounted motors). These consist of one
machine component mounted on another, bolted together at a flange. A typical
system is illustrated below.

4-1
Measurements should be taken with the laser system set up across the coupling to
determine the offset and angle between the two shafts. Correct the angle by shim-
ming in the vertical direction. The offset is corrected by sliding the machine at the
flange.

Mounting Fixtures
Mount the fixtures as pictured in the figure below. It does not matter which head is
on top; this will be configured in the analyzer. For applications with tight mounting
requirements, use thin brackets (P/N 8AA54 or 8AA55). RF or direct connect data
communication to the analyzer can be used.

Note
Because of the orientation of the laser heads gravity is not working on
the sensitive axis. Therefore, the angle sensors cannot measure the
rotational position.

4-2 Vertical Alignment


Help
Depending on where you are within the program, an alignment helper may be
available at the bottom of the screen to provide you with a brief explanation of the
highlighted step or screen. In addition to the alignment helper, a more detailed
explanation of the highlighted step is available for the highlighted step by pressing
the 2130 Help key once and for the screen by pressing 2130 Help key twice. If fur-
ther help is required, refer to the appropriate section(s) in this manual.

Basic Vertical Alignment Steps


Three basic steps are required to complete an alignment job.
1 Define the alignment job
• Setup the job parameters.
• Enter machine dimensions.

2 Acquire alignment data


• Acquire alignment data to determine the alignment condition of the
machine.

3 Review alignment results


• Review machine moves.
• Move the machine, if necessary.

4-3
Vertical Main Screen
The vertical main Laser Align Application screen (sometimes referred to as the
Main Menu) lets you monitor your progress throughout the alignment job. When
a vertical alignment job is active, the Main screen will look as shown below.

Vertical Main screen at job start

The application defaults to a predefined setup when a new job is created. The type
of job, Job ID, Equipment ID, alignment method, number of machine moves, and
number of notes attached to the job are displayed in the upper portion of the main
screen.

Note
Unless otherwise noted, any defaults listed are displayed only at first.
Once a field is modified from the default, the program uses the latest
entry for that field.

4-4 Vertical Alignment


The steps required to perform an alignment are displayed in the center portion of
the main screen. The 2130 Laser Align program leads you through each step of a
routine alignment procedure starting with the Enter Dimensions selection at the
Main screen. Once an alignment job has started the next uncompleted step in the
recommended procedure is highlighted.
An [X] signifies a completed step. As you complete steps, the next recommended
step is highlighted. Initially, the Move Machine step is displayed, but grayed out
until you’ve completed the first two required steps which are critical to the align-
ment job.

Up and Down Arrow keys


Use the Up and Down Arrow keys to highlight each feature. If you select an inactive
step, a popup message reminds you that the selected step is inactive due to missing
information.

Three Step Alignment


To simulate the basic steps required to complete a vertical alignment job, the 2130
Laser Align main screen is set up to allow an alignment job to be performed using
the following three steps:
1 Enter Dimensions
• Enter machine dimensions.
2 Sweep Laser Heads
• Acquire alignment data to determine the alignment condition of the
machine.
3 Move Machine
• Review angular moves.
• Review offset moves.
• Perform a live move and move machine.

4-5
Vertical Main Screen Function Keys

Enter Dimensions
Use the Enter Dimensions key to advance to the Edit Dimensions screen where the
dimensions for the machine being aligned can be entered. This is the first step of
the three-key operation used in performing an alignment job. Refer to the Vertical
Enter Dimensions section on page 4-17 for more information.

Sweep Laser Heads


Use the Sweep Laser Heads key to advance to the data acquisition screen for the
alignment method defined for the job. This is the second step of the three-key
operation used in performing an alignment job. From this screen alignment data
needed to determine the alignment condition of the machine is acquired. Refer to
the Vertical Sweep Laser Heads section on page 4-29 for more information.

Move Machine
Use the Move Machine key to advance to the Angular Move screen where the
angular alignment condition can be reviewed. This is the third step of the three-key
operation used in performing an alignment job. After the Angular Move screen,
the program advances to the Offset Move screen where the machine moves can be
reviewed. If an alignment correction is necessary that requires a live move, this can
also be done from under this step. Refer to the Vertical Move Machine section on
page 4-38 for more information.

Note
The Enter key will perform the same function as the soft key for the
highlighted program step. In addition, the Enter key can be used to
advance you through an alignment job from beginning-to-end using
the job parameters setup on the Alt Main screen.

4-6 Vertical Alignment


Vertical Alt Main Screen
The vertical Alt Main screen (also known as the Main Menu Alt2 screen) allows you
to setup alignment job parameters. The Alt Main screen is reached by pressing the
Alt key on the Main screen.

Vertical Alt Main

Vertical Alt Main Screen 4-7


Vertical Alt Main Screen Function Keys

Note
Use the Notes key to advance to the Notes screens where notes can be
assigned to the current job. In addition to the predefined notes, user
defined notes can also be created and assigned to the current job
from under this option. Refer to the Notes section on page 3-7 for
more information.

Machine Config
Use the Machine Config key to advance to the Machine Configuration screen
where the machine components for the job can be defined. Refer to the Vertical
Machine Configuration section on page 4-11 for more information.

Laser Angle Advance


Use the Laser Angle Advance key to define the fine and coarse incremental adjust-
ments to be applied to the angular position of the laser heads during the data acqui-
sition and live move operations. Refer to the Laser Angle Advance section on page
4-13 for more information.

Laser Mode
Use the Laser Mode key to define the mode of operation for the alignment
method defined. When selected, the mode is toggled between Standard (default)
and Averaging.
The Standard mode of operation is the mode that is most often used during ver-
tical alignments. In this mode of operation, the current laser reading is obtained
from the laser heads.
The Averaging mode of operation is intended to allow multiple sampling of data
in order to reduce the noise in the data by averaging all of the acquired values. In
this mode of operation, the last 20 readings are averaged.

4-8 Vertical Alignment


Laser Sample Rate
Use the Laser Sample Rate key to set the number of samples (in the range 1 to 25)
to be averaged together to generate a single reading. Two samples (default) are typ-
ically sufficient, but for example, if too much background vibration is present, you
may want to increase the number of samples to 25. This option can also be changed
after the job has been created from the Laser Head Status screen.

Estimate C Dim
Use the Estimate C Dim key to define whether or not the C dimension is to be esti-
mated. When selected, the selection is toggled between being enabled and dis-
abled (default). When enabled, the program will estimate the C dimension to be
one half of the B dimension.

Exit Laser Align


Use the Exit Laser Align key to exit the Laser Alignment program and advance you
to the 2130 Home screen.

Laser Config
Use the Laser Config key to advance to the Laser Configuration screen where the
laser head and analyzer addresses can be reviewed and set, and the Laser Head A
and B locations can be set. Refer to the Vertical Laser Configuration section on
page 4-15 for more information.

Job Manager
Use the Job Manager key to advance to the Job Manager screens where a new job
can be created from scratch using default job setups, a new job can be created using
the job setup from an existing job, selected alignment jobs can be deleted from the
analyzer, and jobs can be transferred to and from the PC. This option functions
exactly as described for a horizontal alignment job. Refer to the Job Manager sec-
tion on page 3-34 for more information.

Review Results
Use the Review Results key to enable or disable (default) the Review Results option
in the job flow. When enabled, you are able to review and average together the
results from multiple acquisitions. Refer to the Vertical Review Results section on
page 4-37 for more information.

Vertical Alt Main Screen 4-9


Print Job
The Print Job key prints a summary report of the current job to the Virtual Printer,
if the Virtual Printer is enabled under the General Setup screen of the System Firm-
ware. A summary report includes job information, notes, soft foot data, and
reading set data (machine feet moves and Angle/Offset data). The report includes
only the first and last reading sets that were acquired. The summary report will be
similar to the report displayed on page 3-10.

Job Reset

Clear Job Data


Use the Clear Job Data function to clear all stored data and notes from the active
job. Before any data is cleared, a warning message will be displayed asking the oper-
ator if this is truly the operation to be performed. If the operator answers yes, then
the data stored on the job will be cleared and the operator is taken back to the Main
screen. If the operator answers no, then the operation is aborted and you will
return to the Alt Main screen.

Load Default Values


Use the Load Default Values function to load job default parameters. Before any
defaults are loaded, a warning message will be displayed asking the operator if this
is truly the operation to be performed. If the operator answers yes, then the job
defaults are loaded and all job data is cleared and the operator remains at the Alt
Main screen. If the operator answers no, then the operation is aborted and the
operator remains at the Alt Main screen.

Load Default Tolerances


Use the Load Default Tolerances function to load default alignment tolerances.
Before any defaults are loaded, a warning message will be displayed asking the
operator if this is truly the operation to be performed. If the operator answers yes,
then the default alignment tolerances are loaded and the operator remains at the
Alt Main screen. If the operator answers no, then the operation is aborted and the
operator remains at the Alt Main screen.

4-10 Vertical Alignment


Vertical Machine Configuration
From the Machine Configuration screen you can select the machine components
for the current vertical alignment job. The Machine Configuration screen is
reached by pressing the Machine Config key on the Alt Main screen.

Vertical Machine Configuration Screen

When this option is first selected, the machine type defined for the upper machine
will be highlighted by a red box around the machine type by default. The default
machine types for the upper and lower machines are “Mach A” and “Mach B”.

Up, Down, Left, and Right Arrow keys


Use Up, Down, Left, and Right Arrow keys to select between each of the machine
types.

Vertical Alt Main Screen 4-11


When “Other” is selected as the machine type you can enter a machine name (up
to 7 characters in length). The following machine types can be defined for the job:

Vertical Machine Types

Vertical Machine Configuration Function Keys

Select Upper Machine


Use the Select Upper Machine key to set the upper machine component to the
machine type highlighted by the red box.

Select Lower Machine


Use the Select Lower Machine key to set the lower machine component to the
machine type highlighted by the red box.

4-12 Vertical Alignment


Laser Angle Advance
From the Laser Angle Advance subwindow you can define the fine and coarse
incremental adjustments to be applied to the angular position of the laser heads
during the data acquisition and live move operations. The Laser Angle Advance
subwindow is reached by pressing the Laser Angle Advance key on the Alt Main
screen.

Laser Angle Advance Subwindow

Vertical Alt Main Screen 4-13


Laser Angle Advance Function Keys

Fine
Use the Fine key to define the fine incremental adjustment (in degrees) to be
applied to the angular position of the laser heads during the data acquisition and
live move operations. The range of values that can be entered for the fine adjust-
ment is 1 to 5 degrees. The default is 5.

Coarse
Use the Coarse key to define the coarse incremental adjustment (in degrees) to be
applied to the angular position of the laser heads during the data acquisition and
live move operations. The range of values that can be entered for the fine adjust-
ment is 5 to 90 degrees. The default is 45.

4-14 Vertical Alignment


Vertical Laser Configuration
From the Laser Configuration screen you can configure the location for each of
the laser heads during the alignment, check and set the heads and analyzer
address, and check the operational status of the heads. The Laser Configuration
screen is reached by pressing the Laser Config key on the Alt Main screen.

Vertical Laser Configuration Screen

The location of each head is based on how the machines are viewed. It does not
matter which head is put on which machine; however, the analyzer must know each
head’s location.

Caution!
Selecting the proper configuration for the laser heads is extremely important! If
the setting is wrong, all of the machine’s move calculations will be incorrect.

Vertical Alt Main Screen 4-15


Although both Head A and Head B of the older version of Model 8215/8225 laser
heads have gray front panels with black grid lines, A and B are marked on the front
panel of the laser head. The newer version of Model 8215/8225 laser heads have A
and B marked on the front panel, and additionally can be identified by their dif-
ferent colored front panels. Head A has a gray front panel with white grid lines
while Head B has a blue front panel with white grid lines.

Note
The program automatically knows whether the Model 8215 or the
Model 8225 laser heads are being used.

Vertical Laser Configuration Function Keys

Change Laser Config


Use the Change Laser Config key to toggle configuration of the laser heads. The
display must be set to match the actual location for each of the laser heads based on
how the machines are to be viewed during the alignment.

Laser Address Selection


Use the Laser Address Selection key to check and set the head and analyzer
addresses. This option functions exactly as described for a horizontal alignment
job. Refer to the Laser Address Selection section on page 3-24 for more informa-
tion.

Check Lasers
Use the Check Lasers key to check the operational status of the heads. Except for
the following, this option functions similarly for a horizontal alignment job. Refer
to the Check Lasers section on page 3-24 for more information.

4-16 Vertical Alignment


Note
Both laser heads need to be turned on for this option to function
properly.

• Show Laser Angle


Use the Show Laser Angle key on the Alt screen to display the laser angle.
This option is useful when performing alignments on horizontally mounted
machinery where the movement is at the flange instead of at the feet. This
option can also be changed from the Alt Manual Sweep screen and the Live
Move option.

• Hide Laser Angle


Use the Hide Laser Angle key on the Alt screen similarly as you would the
Show Laser Angle key except this key is used to hide the laser angle if it is dis-
played. Since the angle sensors do not operate properly in the vertical orien-
tation you must hide them and manually enter this information. This option
can also be changed from the Alt Manual Sweep screen and the Live Move
option.

Vertical Enter Dimensions


The Enter Dimensions screen allows you to enter the dimensions for the machine
being aligned. The Enter Dimensions screen is reached by pressing the Enter
Dimensions key on the Main screen.

Vertical Alt Main Screen 4-17


Note
This section assumes that the fixtures are set up to the point that the
laser heads are mounted.

Vertical Enter Dimensions Screen

Note
Unlike a horizontal job, when a machine has been configured as a
“Fixed” machine for a vertical job the program will require all dimen-
sions to be entered for that machine.

4-18 Vertical Alignment


The machine RPM should be unique for each coupling that is defined for this job.
If you have a variable speed machine, enter the highest RPM at which the coupling
will be operated. Also, if a coupling design has shafts operating at different speeds
enter the larger of the two. This parameter is used to establish alignment toler-
ances. Although you are not required to enter the RPM before acquiring data, it is
required before any results can be viewed. The range of values that can be entered
for the RPM are 1 to 99999 RPM.
Dimensions can be expressed in either inches or millimeters (mm), depending on
the analyzer units. The range of values that can be entered for the B dimension is
0.01 to 3600 inches or 0.254 to 91440 mm. The range of values that can be entered
for the A and C dimensions are -3600 to 3600 inches or -91440 to 91440 mm.
When entering any of the machine dimensions, the A dimension should be mea-
sured and extended to the nearest 1/8 inch (3 mm). Dimensions B and C should
be measured to the nearest 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). Refer to the Entering Fractions
section on page 3-45 for information about entering fractions.
Refer to the following table for a description of each dimension.

Measure
Dimension Measurement Description to the
Nearest

Center of flange to be moved to the laser head face on the


upper machine. To enter a measurement for a flange that 1/8 inch
A
falls inside the laser face, place a negative sign (–) in front (3 mm)
of it.

Measure from the inside face of one laser head to the 1/16 inch
B
inside face of the other laser head. (1.5 mm)

From upper laser head to center of coupling or, to the


location where offset tolerances are measured. To enter a
1/16 inch
C measurement where the center of the coupling falls
(1.5 mm)
outside or behind a laser face, place a negative sign (-) in
front of the measurement.

Vertical Alt Main Screen 4-19


Note
The dimensions are the same for both the Model 8215 and the
Model 8225 laser heads.

Up, Down, Left, and Right Arrow keys


Use the Up, Down, Left, and Right Arrow keys to select the field you want to modify
(highlighted with the red box around it).

Enter key
Use the Enter key to advance to the Define Flange screen.

4-20 Vertical Alignment


Define Flange
The Define Flange screen, allows you to enter the dimensions for the flange loca-
tion where moves are to be made.

Define Flange Screen (circular flange)

Vertical Alt Main Screen 4-21


Define Flange Screen (rectangular flange)

Enter key
Use the Enter key to advance to either the Sweep Laser Heads step or the Custom
Pattern screen. If the custom pattern option is not enabled, once all required
dimensions have been entered, the Enter Dimensions step back on the Main
screen will be marked completed and you will advance to the Sweep Laser Heads
step. If the custom pattern option is enabled, you will advance to the Custom Pat-
tern screen.

4-22 Vertical Alignment


Define Flange Function Keys

Change Flange Type


Use the Change Flange Type key to toggle the displayed flange type between a
circle (default) and a rectangle.

Custom Pattern
Use the Custom Pattern key to enable or disable (default) the custom bolt pattern
option for the flange. When enabled, the Enter key will advance you to the Custom
Pattern screen where you can customize the flange. This is useful when the shaft
center is not in the center of the flange or bolts have to be relocated or removed.
Refer to the Custom Pattern section on page 4-25 for information.

Number of Bolts
When a circular flange is defined, use the Number of Bolts key to define the total
number of bolts on the flange. The range of values that can be entered for the fine
adjustment is 3 to 64. The default is 4. This option is not available when a rectan-
gular flange is defined.

Number of X Bolts
When a rectangular flange is defined, use the Number of X Bolts key to define the
total number of bolts on the flange in the X-direction. The range of values that can
be entered for the number of X Bolts is 2 to 32. The default is 2. This option is not
available when a circular flange is defined.

Number of Y Bolts
When a rectangular flange is defined, use the Number of Y Bolts key to define the
total number of bolts on the flange in the Y-direction. The range of values that can
be entered for the number of Y Bolts is 2 to 32. The default is 2. This option is not
available when a circular flange is defined.

Vertical Alt Main Screen 4-23


Pattern X Width
When a circular or rectangular flange is defined, use the Pattern X Width key to
define the X dimension width of the flange. Dimensions can be expressed in either
inches or millimeters (mm), depending on the analyzer units. The range of values
that can be entered for the pattern X Width is 1 to 1000 inches or 25.4 to 25400
mm. The default is 1 inch (25.4 mm).

Pattern Y Width
When a rectangular flange is defined, use the Pattern Y -Width key to define the Y
dimension width of the flange. Dimensions can be expressed in either inches or
millimeters (mm), depending on the analyzer units. The range of values that can
be entered for the pattern Y Width is 1 to 1000 inches or 25.4 to 25400 mm. The
default is 1 inch (25.4 mm). This option is not available when a circular flange is
defined.

Note
When entering any of the flange width dimensions, the X and Y
dimensions should be measured and extended to the nearest 1/8
inch (3 mm). Refer to the Entering Fractions section on page 3-45 for
information about entering fractions.

4-24 Vertical Alignment


Custom Pattern
The Custom Pattern screen, allows you to customize the flange (e.g. move the shaft
center away from the flange center or move one or more bolts to a nonsymmetrical
location). The Custom Pattern screen is reached by pressing the Enter key on the
Define Flange screen, when the Custom Pattern option is enabled.

Custom Pattern Screen (Angle/Radius method)

Vertical Alt Main Screen 4-25


Up and Down Arrow keys
Use the Up and Down Arrow keys to select the item (e.g. the shaft center or bolt)
you want to modify. When the shaft center is selected it will be highlighted in red
while a selected bolt will be highlighted with the red circle around it. The Item to
Edit key can be used to do the same.

Enter key
Use the Enter key, once all required machine dimensions have been entered, to
mark the Enter Dimensions step back on the Main screen completed and advance
to the Sweep Laser Heads step.

4-26 Vertical Alignment


Custom Pattern Function Keys

Insert Bolt
Use the Insert Bolt key to insert an additional bolt at the selected bolt location. This
in turn moves the bolt originally at that location to the flange center. This key is only
active when the item selected for modification is a bolt.

Delete Bolt
Use the Delete Bolt key to delete the selected bolt. Before any bolt is deleted, a
warning message will be displayed asking you if this is truly the operation to be per-
formed. If you answer yes, then the selected bolt will be deleted. If you answer no,
then the operation is aborted. This key is only active when the item selected for
modification is a bolt and more than the minimum number of bolts for the flange
type are present.

Method
Use the Method key to toggle the method between Angle/Radius and X/Y Offset.
When the method is set to Angle/Radius, you can define the location of the
selected item based on a polar coordinate system with the origin at the center of the
flange. When the method is set to X/Y Offset, you can define the location of the
selected item based on an X, Y coordinate system with the origin located in the
bottom, left-hand corner of the figure.

Item to Edit
Use the Item to Edit key to select the item (e.g. the shaft center or bolt) you want to
modify. When the shaft center is selected it will be highlighted in red while a
selected bolt will be highlighted with the red circle around it. The Up and Down
Arrow keys can be used to do the same.

Vertical Alt Main Screen 4-27


Angle
Use the Angle key to define the angle (in degrees) for the selected item. The range
of values that can be entered is 0° to 360°. This option is not available when the
method is set to X/Y Offset.

Radius
Use the Radius key to define the radius for the selected item. Dimensions can be
expressed in either inches or millimeters (mm), depending on the analyzer units.
The range of values that can be entered is 0 to one half the flange width defined
back on the Define Flange screen. This option is not available when the method is
set to X/Y Offset.

X Offset
Use the X Offset key to define the offset in the X-direction for the selected item.
Dimensions can be expressed in either inches or millimeters (mm), depending on
the analyzer units. The range of values that can be entered is 0 to the flange X-width
defined back on the Define Flange screen. This option is not available when the
method is set to Angle/Radius.

Y Offset
Use the Y Offset key to define the offset in the Y-direction for the selected item.
Dimensions can be expressed in either inches or millimeters (mm), depending on
the analyzer units. The range of values that can be entered is 0 to the flange Y-width
defined back on the Define Flange screen. This option is not available when the
method is set to Angle/Radius.

4-28 Vertical Alignment


Vertical Sweep Laser Heads
Once all required machine dimensions have been entered, you are automatically
advanced to the Sweep Laser Heads step. From the Main screen, the Sweep Laser
Heads step is reached by pressing the Sweep Laser Heads key.

Main screen after entering vertical dimensions

The Manual Sweep method is used to acquire vertical alignment data. Data is mea-
sured each time the laser heads are in alignment and the number keypad is
pressed. Data from up to 180 positions may be recorded. This method is especially
useful for performing uncoupled or non-rotational alignments or when too much
background vibration is present.

Note
Both laser heads need to be turned on for this option to function
properly.

Vertical Alt Main Screen 4-29


Other than the angle sensors not being able to measure the rotational position
when the laser heads are in the vertical orientation this method functions similarly
for a horizontal alignment job. The Manual Sweep method requires the laser
heads, or shafts, to be stopped at each position where data is to be taken and a key
pressed to store a reading. Since the angle sensors do not operate properly in the
vertical orientation the Laser Align program requires you to manually tell it the
laser head position.
Before acquiring alignment data, develop an acquisition plan before taking shaft
position data. One plan might be to measure the outside circumference and divide
it into eight equal segments. Mark those locations on the flange and stop at each
location to take data. Although a complete sweep is recommended, it is not
needed. The arc of rotation can vary from as little as 45° to a full 360° (one revolu-
tion); however, Emerson does recommend a minimum of 90°.

Starting Manual Sweep

4-30 Vertical Alignment


The defined flange is displayed graphically in the bottom of the screen. The data
acquisition angular location corresponding to the actual angular location of the
laser heads is displayed just below the flange. A graphical representation of the data
acquisition angular location is displayed in the center of the flange. The data acqui-
sition line starts at the 0° position, which is usually the #1 Bolt position (as shown
above). The current laser reading (in mils or mm, depending on the analyzer
units) for each laser head is displayed in reverse video just right of the flange.

Laser Angle Advance


Use the Laser Angle Advance key on the Alt screen to define the fine and coarse
incremental adjustments to be applied to the angular position of the laser heads
during the data acquisition and live move operations. Refer to the Laser Angle
Advance section on page 4-13 for more information.

Check Lasers key


Use the Check Lasers key on the Alt screen to check the operational status of the
heads. Refer to the Check Lasers section on page 3-30 for more information.

Vertical Alt Main Screen 4-31


Review Results key
Use the Review Results key on the Alt screen to return to the Review Measurements
screen where you can continue reviewing and averaging together the results from
multiple acquisitions. This key is available only when the Review Results option is
enabled on the Alt Main screen and the Review Measurements screen has been
exited before the averaged reading set was saved. Refer to the Vertical Review
Results section on page 4-37 for more information.

Acquiring data using Manual Sweep

Accept Readings key


Use the Accept Readings key to store the data when the laser head positions and
data are as desired. The number of samples, displayed in the top of the screen just
above the flange graphics, will increment by one (180 max). Each time a data point
is stored and the laser heads are rotated to a new position, a thin black line is left
behind to denote where data was acquired.

4-32 Vertical Alignment


Caution!
Before accepting any reading, ensure that the data acquisition location on the
screen corresponds to the actual location of the laser heads.

Note
A minimum of 3 data points over a 45° sweep arc is required, but
Emerson recommends a minimum of 8 data points (samples)
acquired over a sweep arc of at least 90°.

Note
For the greatest accuracy and repeatability, all readings should be
acquired using the same direction of rotation. In addition, it is best to
use the same direction of rotation as the machine rotates when run-
ning normally.

Although the 8215/8225 laser fixtures are designed to be rotated a full revolution
in two seconds - a smooth, uniform acceleration and deceleration during the rota-
tion of the laser heads is necessary for accurate, reliable, and repeatable data.

Caution!
To prevent damage to the laser heads, make sure the antennas do not come into
contact with obstacles (e.g. the ground or base plate) as they are being rotated.
Also, when performing an uncoupled alignment and the laser heads are
mounted in close proximity to each other, make sure the antennas do not come
into contact with each other as one laser head is rotated past the other.

Coarse and Fine Adjustment keys


Use the Coarse and Fine Adjustment keys to move the data acquisition line clock-
wise or counterclockwise around the flange by the number of degrees defined back
on the Alt Main screen. Refer to the Laser Angle Advance section on page 4-13 for
more information.

Vertical Alt Main Screen 4-33


Clear key
Use the Clear key to clear the displayed data average, when the Laser Mode is set to
Averaging. When the Laser Mode is set to Standard, this key is not available.

Enter key
Use the Enter key to accept the data, after you have acquired enough data (sam-
ples). At this point the data is analyzed and a sine wave is curve fit to the data.

Note
A maximum of 20 reading sets (moves) can be stored on an align-
ment job. If more than 20 reading sets are acquired a message is dis-
played giving you the option of either discarding the last reading set
taken or overwriting the 20th reading set with the last reading.

If the fit is satisfactory (85% and above), the program will mark the Sweep Laser
Heads step back on the Main screen completed and advance you to the next step
in the procedure. In addition to marking the Sweep Laser Heads step complete,
the number of moves displayed in the upper section of the main screen is updated.
If the fit is unsatisfactory (less than 85%) a warning message displays to inform you
that the data is “Unfit”. At this point either repeat the data acquisition or try to man-
ually condition or edit the data using the edit data function. This built-in check
helps alert you to the data losing reliability in the misalignment calculations. Refer
to the Display Sine Fit section on page 3-168 for more information.

Note
Remember, when shaft movement due to causes other than misalign-
ment is present in the data this will appear as randomness (noise) in
the data. This is not normally a problem when the misalignment is
great, but will increasingly interfere as the misalignment decreases.
Therefore, the better the alignment the more likely the chance will
be of getting an unfit data warning.

4-34 Vertical Alignment


Get Laser Angle key
Use the Get Laser Angle key on the Alt screen to automatically get the angle posi-
tion of the laser heads. This option is useful when performing alignments on hori-
zontally mounted machinery where the movement is at the flange instead of at the
feet. This option can also be changed from the Alt Laser Head Status screen and
the Live Move option.

Display during collection of angle data; note green background in 180° “window” - a graphic
illustration that the two lasers are within 2° angular alignment of one another

The current laser head positions are displayed just to the left of the flange and
graphically (represented by red lines) in the center of the flange. The background
of the angle positions will be white if the laser heads are not within 2° of each other
and green when the laser heads are within 2° of each other.

Note
Independently of how the data acquisition angular location is
obtained, other than the screen layout, the procedure for acquiring
vertical data is the same.

Vertical Alt Main Screen 4-35


Manually Locate Angle key
Use the Manually Locate Angle key on the Alt screen similarly as you would the Get
Laser Angle key except this key is used to manually locate the data acquisition
angular location corresponding to the actual angular location of the laser heads.
Since the angle sensors do not operate properly in the vertical orientation you will
have to hide them and manually enter this information. This option can also be
changed from the Alt Laser Head Status screen and the Live Move option.

4-36 Vertical Alignment


Vertical Review Results
From the Review Results (Measurements) screen, you are able to review and
average together the results from multiple acquisitions. This option is useful when
the repeatability of the data is a concern. Refer to the Sweep Mode Curve Data sec-
tion on page 3-126 and Data Quality section on page 3-127 for more information.
Except for the following, this option functions similar to a horizontal alignment
job. Refer to the Review Results section on page 3-121 for more information.
The Review Measurements screen is automatically displayed immediately after
acquiring a set of alignment data when the Review Results option is enabled on the
Alt Main screen.

Note
If you exit the Review Measurements screen before saving the aver-
aged reading set, you can return to it using the Review Results key on
the Alt screen of the data acquisition screens.

Vertical Review Measurements Screen

Vertical Alt Main Screen 4-37


The Review Measurements screen contains the alignment condition (angle and
offset), the acquisition date and time, and a symbol representing the Manual
Sweep acquisition method used for each of the readings acquired.

Note
A maximum of 20 reading sets (moves) can be stored on an align-
ment job. If more than 20 reading sets are acquired a message is dis-
played giving you the option of either discarding the last reading set
taken or overwriting the 20th reading set with the last reading.

Vertical Move Machine


Once all required data has been acquired, you are automatically advanced to the
machine moves screens. From the Main screen, the vertical moves screens are
reached by pressing the Move Machine key.

Main screen after acquiring vertical alignment data

4-38 Vertical Alignment


From the Move Machine step, you can review the angular and offset alignment
conditions. Refer to the Angular Move section on page 4-39 and Offset Move sec-
tion on page 4-41 for more information. If an alignment correction requires a live
move, this can also be done from this step. Refer to the Vertical Live Move section
on page 3-150 for more information.

Angular Move
From the Angular Move screen, you can review the angular alignment condition.

Angular Move Screen

The amount of movement at the machine flange (expressed in either mils or mil-
limeters (mm), depending on the analyzer units) is displayed in the table just to the
right of the flange. Emerson recommends that the flange bolts be loosened and
the shims be added (or removed) as suggested in the table. When correcting
angular misalignment keep the flange offset movement to a minimum. After shim-
ming is complete, re-tighten the flange bolts and take a new set of readings.

Vertical Alt Main Screen 4-39


Enter key
Use the Enter key to advance to the next step in the Offset Move screen.

Angular Move Function Keys

Raise Machine
Use the Raise Machine key to display the shim values equivalent to raising the
machine. In this case, all shim values will be positive.

Median
Use the Median key to display the shim values equivalent to making the smallest
moves. In this case, the shim values are centered about an average; therefore, they
will be a mixture of positive and negative values.

Lower Machine
Use the Lower Machine key to display the shim values equivalent to lowering the
machine. In this case, all shim values will be negative.

Switch Move Type


Use the Switch Move Type key to toggle the displayed move type between Angular
Move and Offset Move.

Data Detail
Use the Data Detail key to advance to the tolerance plot screens where graphical
representations of the alignment condition can be reviewed. Refer to the Vertical
Data Detail (Tolerance Plots) section on page 4-45 for more information. In addi-
tion, you can manually condition or edit the sine curve data using the edit data
function.

4-40 Vertical Alignment


Offset Move
From the Offset Move screen, you can review the offset alignment condition.

Offset Move Screen (dual move)

Vertical Alt Main Screen 4-41


Offset Move Screen (single move)

The bull’s-eye target displayed just above the flange represents the alignment con-
dition with respect to the tolerances defined for the job. If the tolerance condition
is greater than 2 times the acceptable tolerance, then the outer band will be red. If
the tolerance condition is 1 to 2 times the acceptable tolerance, then the middle
band will be yellow. If the tolerance condition is less than the acceptable tolerance,
but greater than the excellent tolerance, then the center band (bull’s-eye) will be
green. If the tolerance condition is less than the excellent tolerance, then the
center band will have a black star displayed in it. Refer to the Tolerances section on
page 3-193 for more information.
The amount of movement required to align the machine (expressed in either mils
or millimeters (mm), depending on the analyzer units) is displayed just to the right
of the flange. A graphical representation of the movement (represented by the
single or dual arrows) is displayed in the center of the flange.

4-42 Vertical Alignment


Enter key
Use the Enter key, once you have viewed the machine moves, to advance to the
Main screen where the Move Machine step is marked completed and the Sweep
Laser Heads step is highlighted.

Main screen after viewing machine moves

Vertical Alt Main Screen 4-43


Offset Move Function Keys

Switch Move Type


Use the Switch Move Type key to toggle the displayed move type between Angular
Move and Offset Move.

Data Detail
Use the Data Detail key to advance to the tolerance plot screens where graphical
representations of the alignment condition can be reviewed. Refer to the Vertical
Data Detail (Tolerance Plots) section on page 4-45 for more information. In addi-
tion, you can manually condition or edit the sine curve data using the edit data
function.

Show Single Move


Use the Show Single Move key to display the single move solution.

Show Dual Move


Use the Show Dual Move key to display the dual move solution.

Live Move
Use the Live Move key to observe machine movement while making machine
moves. Refer to the Vertical Live Move section on page 3-150 for more information.

4-44 Vertical Alignment


Vertical Data Detail (Tolerance Plots)
From the Data Detail (Tolerance Plot) screens you can review the graphical repre-
sentation of the alignment condition. In addition, you can manually condition or
edit the sine curve data using the edit data function. Refer to the Display Sine Fit
section on page 3-168 for more information. The tolerance plot screens are
reached by pressing the Data Detail key on the machine move screens. This option
is available only when alignment data is stored on the job.
Except for the following, this option functions similarly for a horizontal alignment
job. Refer to the Data Detail (Tolerance Plot) section on page 3-162 for more infor-
mation.

Vertical Quad Tolerance Plot

Vertical Alt Main Screen 4-45


On the four quadrant tolerance plot screen, if the Tolerance Type is Standard,
alignment angle versus offset data is plotted. In this plot, both the positive and neg-
ative values for the reading sets are plotted.

Vertical Single Tolerance Plot

On the single tolerance plot screen, alignment data is plotted similarly to the four
quadrant tolerance plot, except in this case only the absolute values for the reading
sets are plotted.

4-46 Vertical Alignment


Vertical Alignment Live Move
The Live Move option allows you to observe machine movement while making
machine moves. The Live Move option is initiated by pressing the Live Move key on
the Offset Move screen.

Note
Both laser heads need to be turned on for this option to function
properly.

Vertical Alt Main Screen 4-47


Note
If you try to start another live move after stopping a live move opera-
tion and before a new set of data has been acquired, a warning mes-
sage will be displayed to inform you that a live move may have been
done since alignment data was last acquired. Once a live move has
been done a second live move should not be done without first
acquiring a new set of laser readings. If you answer yes, then you will
continue with the live move. If you answer no, then the operation is
aborted. This same message is also displayed on an activated align-
ment job if a new set of data has not been acquired since the job was
activated.

Vertical Alignment Live Move Screen

4-48 Vertical Alignment


The Live Move screen prompts you to position the laser heads before starting the
live move. The defined flange is displayed graphically at the bottom of the screen.
The data acquisition angular location corresponding to the actual angular location
of the laser heads is displayed just below the flange. A graphical representation of
the data acquisition angular location is displayed in the center of the flange. The
data acquisition line starts at the 0° position, which is usually the #1 Bolt position (as
illustrated above).

Start key
Use the Start key to start the live move after the laser heads are in the chosen rota-
tional position. The Enter key can be used to do the same.

Coarse and Fine Adjustment keys


Use the Coarse or Fine Adjustment keys to move the data acquisition line clockwise
or counterclockwise around the flange by the number of degrees defined back on
the Alt Main screen. Refer to the Laser Angle Advance section on page 4-13 for
more information.

Laser Angle Advance


Use the Laser Angle Advance key on the Alt screen to define the fine and coarse
incremental adjustments to be applied to the angular position of the laser heads
during the data acquisition and live move operations. Refer to the Laser Angle
Advance section on page 4-13 for more information.

Check Lasers key


Use the Check Lasers key on the Alt screen to check the operational status of the
heads. Refer to the Check Lasers section on page 3-24 for more information.

Caution!
Do not reposition the laser heads after the live move has been started. Changing
the positions of the laser heads after starting the live move will cause the move to
be incorrect.

Vertical Alt Main Screen 4-49


Caution!
Do not loosen the flange hold down bolts until after the live move has been
started. Loosening the flange hold down bolts prior to starting the live move can
cause the move to be incorrect.

Alignment condition is greater than 2 times the acceptable tolerance

Once the live move operation is started, the offset movement required to align the
machine is displayed just to the right of the flange. The angle position (represented
by a red hash mark) is displayed on the outer most part of the flange.

4-50 Vertical Alignment


The bull’s-eye target displayed just above the flange represents a continuous update
of the alignment condition with respect to the tolerances defined for the job. If the
tolerance condition is greater than 2 times the acceptable tolerance, then the outer
band will be red. If the tolerance condition is 1 to 2 times the acceptable tolerance,
then the middle band will be yellow. If the tolerance condition is less than the
acceptable tolerance, but greater than the excellent tolerance, then the center
band (bull’s-eye) will be green. If the tolerance condition is less than the excellent
tolerance, then the center band will have a black star displayed in it. Refer to the
Tolerances section on page 3-193 for more information.
The amount of movement required to align the machine (expressed in either mils
or millimeters (mm), depending on the analyzer units) is displayed just to the right
of the flange. A graphical representation of the movement (represented by single
or dual arrows) is displayed in the center of the flange.
Once the live move has been started loosen the flange hold down bolts and move
the machine(s) until they are within tolerance, and then retighten the flange hold
down bolts before exiting the live mode.

Stop key
Use the Stop key to stop the live move once the machine(s) are within tolerance
and advance back to the move screen this option was accessed from. The Enter key
can be used to do the same.

Caution!
When the machine(s) are within tolerance, before exiting the live move, tighten
the flange hold down bolts. If the machine(s) remain within tolerance when the
flange hold down bolts are tightened, then you can exit the Live Move option.

Caution!
Do not use a hammer to move machines. These impacts may move either sensor
head, causing improper machine positioning. Emerson recommends that you
use jack bolts (permanent or portable).

Vertical Alt Main Screen 4-51


Caution!
On completion of a live move, always acquire a new set of alignment data to
verify and finalize the machine’s alignment condition.

Caution!
Never rely on a live machine move for the final alignment condition of the
machine. Since there is always some variability introduced into the alignment
data due to shaft clearances, bearing faults, base deterioration, etc. Refer to the
Data Quality section on page 3-127 for more information.

4-52 Vertical Alignment


Show Shim Table
Use the Show Shim Table key to display the last shim table and values selected back
on the Angular Move screen. If Raise Machine was last selected, then the shim
values are equivalent to raising the machine. In this case, all shim values will be pos-
itive. If Median was last selected, then the shim values are equivalent to making the
smallest moves. In this case, the shim values are centered about an average; there-
fore, they will be a mixture of positive and negative values. If Lower Machine was
last selected, then the shim values are equivalent to lowering the machine. In this
case, all shim values will be negative.

Live Move Screen with Angular Move shim table displayed

Show Single Move


Use the Show Single Move key to display the single move solution.

Show Dual Move


Use the Show Dual Move key to display the dual move solution.

Vertical Alt Main Screen 4-53


Get Laser Angle key
Use the Get Laser Angle key on the Alt screen to automatically get the angle posi-
tion of the laser heads. This option is useful when performing alignments on hori-
zontally mounted machinery where the movement is at the flange instead of at the
feet. This option can also be changed from the Alt Laser Head Status screen and
the Live Move option.

Angles automatically collected (prior to Start)

4-54 Vertical Alignment


Angles automatically collected (After Start)

The current laser head positions are displayed just below the flange. The back-
ground of the angle positions will be white if the laser heads are not within 2° of
each other and green when the laser heads are within 2° of each other. The average
angle position (represented by a red line or red hash mark) is displayed on the
inside or outer most part of the flange, depending on the screen.

Note
Independently of how the data acquisition angular location is
obtained, other than the screen layout, the procedure for acquiring
vertical data is the same.

Vertical Alt Main Screen 4-55


Manually Locate Angle key
Use the Manually Locate Angle key on the Alt screen similarly as you would the Get
Laser Angle key except this key is used to manually locate the data acquisition
angular location corresponding to the actual angular location of the laser heads.
Since the angle sensors do not operate properly in the vertical orientation you must
hide them and manually enter this information. This option can also be changed
from the Alt Laser Head Status screen and the Live Move option.

4-56 Vertical Alignment


Chapter 5

Straightness Measurements
1

The straightness feature found in the Advanced 2130 Laser Align application is
used to determine surface profiles. This profile can be of a motor baseplate or
checking the crown on a rolling application. You must use a set of laser sensor
heads and mounting fixtures (CSI model 8AA50) to acquire surface profile read-
ings.

5-1
Help
Depending on where you are within the program, an alignment helper may be
available at the bottom of the screen to provide you with a brief explanation of the
highlighted step or screen. In addition to the alignment helper, the functionality of
any soft key is available. This is accessed by pressing the 2130 Help key once, and
then pressing the soft key for which help is desired. Pressing the Help key twice
returns a help message for the active program screen. If further help is required,
refer to the appropriate section(s) in this manual.

Basic Straightness Measurement Steps


Three basic steps are required to acquire straightness measurements.

1 Define the straightness job


• Setup the job parameters.
• Enter profile dimensions.

2 Acquire straightness data


• Acquire straightness data to determine the surface profile of the compo-
nent.

Note

3 Review straightness profile results


• Review surface profile.

5-2 Straightness Measurements


Straightness Main Screen
The straightness main Laser Align Application screen (sometimes referred to as
the Main Menu) lets you monitor your progress throughout the straightness job.
When a straightness job is active, the Main screen will look as shown below.

Straightness Main screen at job start

The application defaults to a predefined setup when a new job is created. The type
of job, Job ID, Equipment ID, number of machine moves, and number of notes
attached to the job are displayed in the upper portion of the main screen.

Note
Unless otherwise noted, any defaults listed are displayed only at first.
Once a field is modified from the default, the program uses the latest
entry for that field.

5-3
The steps required to acquire straightness measurements are displayed in the
center portion of the main screen. The 2130 Laser Align program leads you
through each step of a routine straightness procedure starting with the Enter
Dimensions selection at the Main screen. Once a straightness job has started the
next uncompleted step in the recommended procedure is highlighted.
An [X] signifies a completed step. As you complete steps, the next recommended
step is highlighted. Initially, the Surface Profile step is displayed, but grayed out
until you’ve completed first two required steps which are critical to the straightness
jobs.

Up and Down Arrow keys


Use the Up and Down Arrow keys to highlight each feature. If you select an inactive
step, a popup message reminds you that the selected step is inactive due to missing
information.

Three Step Straightness Measurements


To simulate the basic steps required to complete a straightness job, the 2130 Laser
Align main screen is set up to allow a straightness job to be performed using the fol-
lowing three steps:

1 Enter Dimensions
• Enter profile dimensions.

2 Move Laser Heads


• Acquire straightness data to determine the surface profile of the compo-
nent.

3 Surface Profile
• Review surface profile.

5-4 Straightness Measurements


Straightness Main Screen Function Keys

Enter Dimensions
Use the Enter Dimensions key to advance to the Edit Dimensions screen where the
dimensions for the profile being measured can be entered. This is the first step of
the three-key operation used in performing a straightness job. Refer to the Straight-
ness Enter Dimensions section on page 5-11 for more information.

Move Laser Heads


Use the Move Laser Heads key to advance to the data acquisition screen. This is the
second step of the three-key operation used in performing a straightness job. From
this screen straightness data needed to determine the surface profile is acquired.
Refer to the Straightness Move Laser Heads section on page 5-15 for more informa-
tion.

Surface Profile
Use the Surface Profile key to advance to the plot screen where the surface profile
can be reviewed. This is the third step of the three-key operation used in per-
forming a straightness job. Refer to the Straightness Surface Profile section on page
5-18 for more information.

Note
The Enter key will perform the same function as the soft key for the
highlighted program step. In addition, the Enter key can be used to
advance you through a straightness job from beginning-to-end using
the job parameters setup on the Alt Main screen.

5-5
Straightness Alt Main Screen
The straightness Alt Main screen (also known as the Main Menu Alt2 screen) allows
you to setup straightness job parameters. The Alt Main screen is reached by
pressing the Alt key on the Main screen.

Straightness Alt Main

Straightness Alt Main Screen Function Keys

Note
Use the Notes key to advance to the Notes screens where notes can be
assigned to the current job. In addition to the predefined notes, user
defined notes can also be created and assigned to the current job
from under this option. Refer to the Notes section on page 3-8 for
more information.

5-6 Straightness Measurements


Laser Mode
Use the Laser Mode key to define the mode of operation for the alignment
method defined. When selected, the mode is toggled between Standard (default)
and Averaging.
The Standard mode of operation is the mode that is most often used when
acquiring straightness data. In this mode of operation, the current laser reading is
obtained from the laser heads.
The Averaging mode of operation is intended to allow multiple sampling of data in
order to reduce the noise in the data by averaging all of the acquired values. In this
mode of operation, readings are continuously averaged.

Laser Sample Rate


Use the Laser Sample Rate key to set the number of samples (in the range 1 to 25)
to be averaged together to generate a single reading. Two samples (default) are typ-
ically sufficient, but for example, if too much background vibration is present, you
may want to increase the number of samples to 25. This option can also be changed
after the job has been created from the Laser Head Status screen.

Exit Laser Align


Use the Exit Laser Align key to exit the Laser Alignment program and advance to
the 2130 Home screen.

Laser Config
Use the Laser Config key to advance to the Laser Configuration screen where the
laser head and analyzer addresses can be reviewed and set, and the Laser Head A
and B locations can be set. Refer to the Straightness Laser Configuration section on
page 5-9 for more information.

Job Manager
Use the Job Manager key to advance to the Job Manager screens where a new job
can be created from scratch using default job setups, a new job can be created using
the job setup from an existing job, selected alignment jobs can be deleted from the
analyzer, and jobs can be transferred to and from the PC. This option functions
exactly as described for a horizontal alignment job. Refer to the Job Manager sec-
tion on page 3-34 for more information.

5-7
Job Reset
The Job Reset key allows the operator to "Clear Job Data" or "Load Default Values".

Clear Job Data


Use the Clear Job Data function to clear all stored data and notes from the active
job. Before any data is cleared, a warning message will be displayed asking the oper-
ator if this is truly the operation to be performed. If the operator answers yes, then
the data stored on the job will be cleared and the operator is taken back to the Main
screen. If the operator answers no, then the operation is aborted and you will
return to the Alt Main screen.

Load Default Values


Use the Load Default Values function to load job default parameters. Before any
defaults are loaded, a warning message will be displayed asking the operator if this
is truly the operation to be performed. If the operator answers yes, then the job
defaults are loaded and all job data is cleared and the operator remains at the Alt
Main screen. If the operator answers no, then the operation is aborted and the
operator remains at the Alt Main screen.

5-8 Straightness Measurements


Straightness Laser Configuration
From the Laser Configuration screen you can configure the location for each of
the laser heads during the profile measurements, check and set the heads and ana-
lyzer address, and check the operational status of the heads. The Laser Configura-
tion screen is reached by pressing the Laser Config key on the Alt Main screen.

Straightness Laser Configuration Screen

The location of each head is based on how the profile is viewed. It does not matter
which head is on one side or another; however, the analyzer must know each head’s
location.
Although both Head A and Head B of the older version of Model 8215/8225 laser
heads have gray front panels with black grid lines, A and B are marked on the front
panel of the laser head. The newer version of Model 8215/8225 laser heads have A
and B marked on the front panel, and in addition can be identified by their dif-
ferent colored front panels. Head A has a gray front panel with white grid lines
while Head B has a blue front panel with white grid lines.

5-9
Note
The program automatically knows whether the Model 8215 or the
Model 8225 laser heads are being used.

Straightness Laser Configuration Function Keys

Change Laser Config


Use the Change Laser Config key to togglethe configuration of the laser heads.
The display must be set to match the actual location for each of the laser heads
based on how the machines are to be viewed during the alignment.
There are four ways to configure the laser fixtures. The first consideration is which
fixture is to be fixed and which one will be moved. The configuration shown above
is for the left fixture (Head A in this case) to be fixed (represented by a dashed line/
arrow pointing in the direction of the moved fixture) while the right fixture (Head
B in this case) is to be moved (represented by position numbers followed by an
ellipsis).

Laser Address Selection


Use the Laser Address Selection key to check and set the head and analyzer
addresses. This option functions exactly as described for a horizontal alignment
job. Refer to the Laser Address Selection section on page 3-26 for more informa-
tion.

Check Lasers
Use the Check Lasers key to check the operational status of the heads. This option
functions exactly as described for a horizontal alignment job. Refer to the Check
Lasers section on page 3-30 for more information.

Note
Both laser heads need to be turned on for this option to function
properly.

5-10 Straightness Measurements


Straightness Enter Dimensions
The Enter Dimensions screen allows you to enter the dimensions for the profile
being measured. The Enter Dimensions screen is reached by pressing the Enter
Dimensions key on the Main screen.

Note
This section assumes that the fixtures are set up to the point that the
laser heads are mounted.

Straightness Enter Dimensions Screen

5-11
The configuration shown above is for the left fixture (Head A in this case) to be
fixed (represented by a dashed line/arrow pointing in the direction of the moved
fixture) while the right fixture (Head B in this case) is to be moved (identified with
position numbers). The Enter Dimensions screen will display up to three measure-
ment locations at one time. If the last segment defined (furthest from the fixed
laser head) is displayed, the reference line will extend no further than the last laser
to indicate that this is the last measurement location for the moveable laser head
defined (as illustrated above).

Measurement locations defined beyond what is displayed

5-12 Straightness Measurements


If the last segment displayed is not the last measurement location for the moveable
laser head defined, the reference line will extend beyond the last laser head dis-
played to indicate that more measurement locations are defined (as illustrated
above).

Six Measurement locations defined

A graph representing the overall setup is displayed at the bottom of the screen. The
laser heads for the each of the segments defined, including the fixed laser head are
represented on the graph by miniaturized laser fixtures. The positions (segment
lengths) for each of the laser heads will be to scale. The highlighted segment is rep-
resented on the graph by a small arrow centered between the segment’s two laser
heads. The reference line from the location of the fixed laser head is represented
on the graph by a dashed line protruding from the fixed laser head in the direction
(indicated by an arrowhead) of the measurement locations for the moveable laser
head. In the example screen above, a total of six measurement segments have been
defined (represented by miniaturized laser fixtures) and the last (or fifth) segment
field is active (represented by a small arrow).

5-13
Dimensions can be expressed in either inches or millimeters (mm), depending on
the analyzer units. The range of values that can be entered is 0.01 to 3600 inches or
0.254 to 91440 mm. Each dimension should be measured and extended to the
nearest 1/8 inch (3 mm). Refer to the Entering Fractions section on page 3-51 for
information about entering fractions.

Up Arrow key
Use the Up Arrow key to insert a measurement segment just ahead of the high-
lighted segment. An inserted segment will have the same length as the highlighted
segment. Up to 50 segments can be defined. Therefore, this key is only active when
less than 50 segments have been defined.

Down Arrow key


Use the Down Arrow key to delete the highlighted segment. Before any segment is
deleted, a warning message will be displayed asking you if this is truly the operation
to be performed. If you answer yes, then the highlighted segment will be deleted.
If you answer no, then the operation is aborted. No less than 2 segments can be
defined. Therefore, this key is only active when more than 2 segments have been
defined.

Caution!
Use extreme caution with the delete segment option when the segment has impor-
tant profile data stored on it. Once you answer yes to the warning message all
data will be lost.

Left and Right Arrow keys


Use the Left and Right Arrow keys to select the field you want to modify (high-
lighted with the red box around it).

Enter key
Use the Enter key, once all required machine dimensions have been entered, to
mark the Enter Dimensions step back on the Main screen completed and advance
to the Move Laser Heads step.

5-14 Straightness Measurements


Straightness Move Laser Heads
Once all required machine dimensions have been entered, you are automatically
advanced to the data acquisition screen. From the Main screen, the data acquisition
screen is reached by pressing the Move Laser Heads key.

Main screen after entering profile dimensions

Laser communications with the moveable head must be established to collect data
at the defined segments.

Note
Both laser heads need to be turned on for this option to function
properly.

5-15
In general this alignment method is most easily accomplished by having the sleep-
mode of the laser heads disabled.

Note
To disable the sleep mode on each laser head, with the laser heads
powered off, press and hold down the Power Buttons. This will cause
the laser heads and their corresponding LED’s to power on for
approximately 2 seconds. Then laser heads and their corresponding
LED’s will power off for approximately 3 seconds. After the laser
heads and their corresponding LED’s power back on again the shut-
down mode will be disabled. To re-enable the sleep mode, just power
the heads off.

Acquiring Straightness Data

5-16 Straightness Measurements


The current laser reading (in mils or mm, depending on the analyzer units) is dis-
played for the selected segment (highlighted with the red box around it). Dashed
lines displayed just under a segment indicate that no data has been accepted for
that segment. Start at the farthest point and center both lasers. The moveable
sensor head should be positioned so that the beam from the stationary head is hor-
izontally centered in the moveable heads target. If it is not within a band ± 40 mils
of the center vertical axis, the error message “Beam horizontally off center” will be
displayed. To remove the message, readjust the moveable sensor head.
Just like the Enter Dimensions screen, the Straightness Data screen will display up
to three measurement locations at one time. If the last segment defined (furthest
from the fixed laser head) is displayed, the reference line will extend no further
than the last laser to indicate that this is the last measurement location for the move-
able laser head defined (as shown above). If the last segment displayed is not the
last measurement location for the moveable laser head defined, the reference line
will extend beyond the last laser head displayed to indicate that more measurement
locations are defined.
A graph representing the overall setup is displayed at the bottom of the screen. The
laser heads for the each of the segments defined, including the fixed laser head are
represented on the graph by miniaturized laser fixtures. The positions (segment
lengths) for each of the laser heads will be to scale. The selected segment is repre-
sented on the graph by a small arrow just below that segment laser head. The refer-
ence line from the location of the fixed laser head is represented on the graph by
a dashed line protruding from the fixed laser head in the direction (indicated by
an arrowhead) of the measurement locations for the moveable laser head. In the
example screen above, a total of six measurement segments have been defined
(represented by miniaturized laser fixtures) and the last segment is selected (repre-
sented by a small arrow just below it).

Check Lasers key


Use the Check Lasers key on the Alt screen to check the operational status of the
heads. Refer to the Check Lasers section on page 3-30 for more information

Accept Reading key


Use the Accept Reading key to accept and store the value displayed.

First key
Use the First key to move to the first segment (closest to the fixed head).

5-17
Last key
Use the Last key to move to the last segment (furthest from the fixed head).

Left and Right Arrow keys


Use the Left and Right Arrow keys to move to the next segment to the left and right.

Clear key
Use the Clear key to delete a reading stored on the selected segment.

Enter key
Use the Enter key to accept all the readings stored on each segment and advance
to the Surface Profile plot.

Straightness Surface Profile


Once all data has been acquired, you are automatically advanced to the surface pro-
file plot screen. From the Main screen, the surface profile plot screen is reached by
pressing the Surface Profile key.

Main screen after acquiring straightness data

5-18 Straightness Measurements


From the surface profile plot screen, you can review the results of the profile mea-
surements.

Surface Profile Plot

Segment readings will be plotted on the x-y graph with lines connecting each of the
readings. Readings will be either in mils or millimeters (mm), depending on the
analyzer units. A reference line represented by a dashed line will be displayed hor-
izontally along the origin of the Y-Axis.
When plotting straightness profile readings, it is the relationship of the measured
readings to the reference line that is plotted and not the actual measured readings
themselves. The height of the first and last segment for which readings were
acquired will be set to zero; therefore, they will be located on the reference line.
The height for all other segments for which readings were measured will be their
calculated height from the reference line.
Any segments for which readings have not been measured will be displayed at the
appropriate segment distance along the X-axis. When the cursor is active on one of
these segments it will be indicated as not being measured. When a cursor is active,
the following values for the selected reading are displayed just below the plot:

5-19
• Segment number
This variable indicates the segment number of the selected reading.

• Distance
This variable indicates the segment distance from the fixed laser head.

• Measured value
This variable indicates the measured reading value for the segment.

• Height
This variable indicates the height of the segment reading from the laser reference
line (dotted line).
The available soft keys function similarly for most horizontal alignment job plots.
Refer to the Data Detail (Tolerance Plot) section on page 3-162 for more informa-
tion about these keys.

Up and Down Arrow keys


Use the Up and Down Arrow keys to expand and compress (contract) the Y Axis
by a factor of two.

Left and Right Arrow keys


Use the Left and Right Arrow keys to move the cursor between the readings.

5-20 Straightness Measurements


Enter key
Use the Enter key, once you have reviewed the surface profile, to advance to the
Main screen where the Surface Profile step is marked completed and the Move
Laser Heads step is highlighted.

Main screen after viewing surface profile

5-21
5-22 Straightness Measurements
Appendix A

Application Information

Machinery Shaft Alignment – General Overview


Poor shaft alignment can cause the following problems:
• Bearing failure
• Shaft deflection fatigue
• Seal leakage and failure
• Coupling failure
• Internal heating
• High energy consumption
• Excessive vibrations (studies have shown that almost 50% of excessive vibra-
tion in direct-coupled rotating equipment is due to misalignment)
Proper machine alignment will result in:
• Less downtime (increased production)
• Increased bearing life
• Lower energy costs
• Increased coupling life
• Lower vibration (lower maintenance costs, even on surrounding
machinery)
A successful alignment job involves completing at least five major steps:
• Pre-job preparation and setup (considering items such as soft foot, base
integrity, pipe strain, documentation, and tolerances)
• Measurement of the amount and direction of misalignment
• Calculating corrective moves
• Actually moving the equipment within preset tolerances
• Documentation of work done for use in future alignment jobs

A-1
Early alignment methods involved using a straightedge along the coupling rims.
This is still a good procedure to use as a preliminary step. In fact, for low speed
machines, operated infrequently for short periods of time, it may be all that is
needed.
However, more complex machines require more than this. Feeler gages, inside
micrometers, and dial indicators are now used extensively for taking precise align-
ment measurements and monitoring corrective moves. These tools can give good
results when used properly.
Mistakes, however, can cause errors in the alignment procedure. Errors that com-
monly occur are:
• Failing to document the job setup, problems, findings, and data
• Failing to use good indicator brackets
• Failing to determine the correct amount of bracket sag
• Misreading the indicators
• Failing to detect sticking indicators
• Mistakes in recording and interpreting the data
• Errors in calculating the moves
• Errors in making moves
These types of errors are even more likely to occur when you have pressure to com-
plete the job quickly.
The Emerson CSI alignment equipment can help you avoid these kinds of mis-
takes. Our adjustable brackets are designed to fit most machines. Since there are no
axial projecting arms, bracket sag is zero. Misalignment readings are calculated
automatically and required moves are then displayed. If a serious mistake is made,
the system will prompt you for corrected entries before moving on to the next step.
Completed jobs are easily documented. Documented jobs can then be stored in
UltraMgr, a PC-based, corrective technologies information management system.
This documented history can be used to enhance troubleshooting, identify per-
sonnel candidates for additional training, reduce alignment time, etc. See
“UltraMgr” on page 3-199 for more information.

A-2 -
Alignment Application Notes
To achieve ideal machine alignment, the shaft centerline of one machine element
(such as a motor) must coincide with the centerline extension of another machine
shaft (such as a pump) during operation. In more complex applications, three or
more elements may be aligned in a train.

Alignment Application Notes A-3


Misalignment can occur both horizontally and vertically. Most misaligned
machines have a combination of offset and angular misalignment (see following
figure).

Alignment Examples

A-4 -
Pre-job Preparation and Setup
Before starting any alignment job, the history of alignments performed on this
machine(s) should be reviewed. Were any special problems found during the pre-
vious alignment; if so, what were they (soft foot, piping strain, coupling problems,
etc.)? How well was the machine aligned and who performed the alignment?
Answering these questions along with having a predefined job setup reduces the
pre-job preparation time and decreases the total time to do the job.
Now that the past is known, before proceeding with alignment measurements,
ensure that your machine(s) are mounted on the base, or foundation, with no soft
foot condition present. If one of your machines is defined to be fixed, soft foot
should be checked for that machine also. Soft foot problems can place stress on the
machine when the anchor bolts are tightened. Uneven height of the base surface,
dirt or corrosion under the feet, or other irregularities can all cause the machine to
be supported unevenly — a condition known as “soft foot”. In addition to preventing
proper machine alignment, extreme soft foot conditions can actually cause
damage to the machine (warped or cracked feet, etc.).
Two major reasons for correcting soft foot are (1) to avoid “chasing your tail”
during the alignment and (2) to remove the stress and enable the machine(s) to
operate at their best. Therefore, all machines should be checked for soft foot, not
just the machine being moved.
Additional pre-alignment considerations include:
• Proper foundation
• Grouting (suitable material with no voids or cracks)
• Baseplate (must be clean, rigid, and properly designed)
• Coupling (properly selected and installed)
• Machinery element supports (no cracks and tight)
• Minimize pipe strain

Proper Foundation
On new installations, allow foundation concrete to cure sufficiently before
installing your machines. Normally, you should not mount machines directly on
the foundation. Base plates usually provide more stability. Also, to make future
alignments easier, a set of high quality (stainless steel, etc.) pre-cut shims should be
placed beneath each foot. These should be at least 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.

Alignment Application Notes A-5


Coupling Considerations
Emerson’s alignment system is not affected by axial float and the effects from tor-
sional play (backlash) in the coupling are minimal. However, you should ensure
that the coupling is properly installed and not in such poor condition that it
adversely affects the alignment process. Also, Emerson recommends (while align-
ment is being performed) that you eliminate torsional play by rotating the driving
machine in the same direction that it normally operates. If necessary, put a drag on
the driven end to prevent gravity overswing.

Minimize Pipe Strain


Excessive pipe strain can create serious problems and should be corrected before
attempting machine alignment. Ensure that pipes are fitted correctly and, if neces-
sary, have some flexibility. In some cases, stationary pipes fitted directly to the
machine can cause machine movement as they heat up (thermal growth).

Changes That Occur During Operation


Machine alignment can change significantly as machines are started from a “cold”
position and run up to operating speed (“hot” position). Some factors that can
influence alignment include:
• Thermal growth
• Torque transmission forces
• Aerodynamic forces
• Hydraulic forces

Thermal Growth
Unfortunately, machines that must be aligned may not expand thermally at the
same rate. Because of this, you may have to intentionally misalign them in their
“cold” positions in order to achieve alignment when they are “hot”. The following
drawing shows an example of this.

A-6 -
Different Thermal Expansion Rate Examples

The Model 2130 Laser Align program allows you to input the amount of vertical
and horizontal thermal growth at each machine foot. There are several methods
that can be used to calculate this growth.

Alignment Application Notes A-7


Alignment Pitfalls
Some pitfalls to good alignment are:
• Improperly or not correcting for soft foot
• Thermal growth
• Excessive shaft play or radial clearances
• Bent shafts
• Damaged bearings
• Torsional play

A-8 -
Appendix B

Foot Pre-Check Types

Foot Pre-Check Measurement Methods – Soft Foot and Frame Distortion


Index (FDI)
Soft foot is a condition where all feet (typically four) of a machine component
(such as a motor or gearbox) will not rest on the same plane. This condition also
exists if the machine baseplate pads (where the machine foot rests) are not on that
same plane. If this condition continues to exist and is not corrected, two problems
will occur.
First, it will be very difficult to align the machine. You will appear to be “going in cir-
cles” trying to move the machine into alignment. Second, but most important, the
machine will not operate properly. The component was not designed to operate in
a bound condition. When this happens, binding will occur causing stress at the
bearings and changing the operating clearances (inside the component). To pre-
vent binding, you must check all the feet, even those on the machine not being moved.
Traditional methods of measuring soft foot conditions included mounting a dial
indicator at the machine foot (similar to Fig 1). The hold-down bolt was then loos-
ened while the indicator was watched for movement. If the indicator moved more
than a predetermined amount (usually 0.003 inch), the foot required correction.
A shim equal to the amount of the indicator movement was then shoved under the
foot.

Fig 1 Fig 2

B-1
This method assumed that a parallel soft foot existed. However, a large percentage
of problem feet are angular soft feet (similar to Fig 2). Correcting this type of problem
with a full shim can make the condition worse (see Fig 3). Correction should be
determined with a set of thickness gauges (feeler gauges). The result is usually a
wedge shim similar to Fig 4.

Fig 3 Fig 4

The laser alignment system allows you to locate the problem feet and bypass those
feet that are OK. While the hold-down bolts are individually loosened and retight-
ened, the laser system will measure the shaft to shaft position. This actually mea-
sures how much each connection affects shaft alignment. In a perfect condition,
loosening bolts should not move the shafts at all.
Two different laser methods are available to evaluate the measured movement at
the shafts. They are:
• Soft Foot
• Frame Distortion Index (FDI)
Although they evaluate the data differently, both methods give you a sense of soft
foot severity at each location. Soft Foot results are shown by the number of X’s dis-
played and FDI results are shown as a numerical value.

B-2 -
Soft Foot Evaluation
The Soft Foot evaluation provides you with a sense of severity without showing
numbers. Numbers are not used because, most of the time, they are mistaken for the value
of the shims (totally wrong). When the numbers are calculated, they are compared
against the tolerance (usually 0.5 mils/inch). If a particular foot is below the toler-
ance, it is labeled OK. If the number is between one and two times the tolerance, it
is labeled with a single X. If the number is between two and three times the toler-
ance, it is labeled as XX. If the number is greater than three times the tolerance, it
is labeled as XXX (the more X’s, the greater the severity).
The number is evaluated by taking the horizontal and vertical movement on each
target and calculating the total movement on each target. The largest movement
of the two is then divided by the distance between the heads (dimension C) to
determine the angle of deflection caused by loosening a hold-down bolt. This
angle is compared to the tolerance for final evaluation for that foot.
The advantage of this method is that it uses a combination of horizontal and ver-
tical movements on the target to determine the problem feet. Experience has
shown that approximately 20% of the soft foot conditions cause a horizontal move
because of a severely bent foot.

Note
The tolerance can be changed in UltraMgr and downloaded to the
analyzer. See “Tolerances” on page 3-193 for more information on
loading tolerances to the analyzer.

FDI Evaluation
The Frame Distortion Index provides you with a sense of severity with numbers.

Caution!
Do not mistake these numbers for shim values.

When the numbers are calculated, they are compared against the tolerance (usu-
ally excellent <2 mils and acceptable <3 mils). If a particular foot is in the excellent
range, the number is plain. If the foot is acceptable, it will have a clear box around
the number. If the foot is out-of-tolerance, it will have a solid box around the
number. The higher the number, the greater the severity.

B-3
Note
The tolerance can be changed in UltraMgr and downloaded to the
analyzer. See “Tolerances” on page 3-193 for more information on
loading tolerances to the analyzer.

The number is evaluated by measuring the vertical angle and applying it to an old
millwright’s “rule of thumb”. It is:
FDI = 2 x Vertical Angle x Inboard to Outboard Foot Distance
Vertical angle is measured at the shafts when the hold-down bolts are loosened and
the Inboard to Outboard Distance is the distance from the front to the back feet of
the component being measured (dimensions A or E in the Machine Dimensions
screen). This value is compared to the tolerance for final evaluation for that foot.
The disadvantage of this method is that it uses only vertical movement to deter-
mine the problem feet (and the numbers are commonly mistaken for shim correc-
tion values). However, this is the only method currently used by Prüftechnic alignment
products.

B-4 -
Appendix C

Technical Specifications

Model 8215/8225 Laser Alignment Fixtures Specifications

Specification Description

Laser Diode In-Ga-Al-P, Class II (CDRH) / Class2 (IEC), Visible


Wavelength 670 nm (typical)
Output power Pulsed, <1.0 mW (average)
Laser Safety Class Class II (CDRH) / Class2 (IEC)
FDA 21CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11
Beam Divergence <225 µrad (8215), <30 µrad (8225),
Target Size 8215: 10 mm by 10 mm (0.394 inches by 0.394 inches)
8225: 20 mm by 20 mm (0.787 inches by 0.787 inches)
Target Range (typical) 8215: 9 mm by 9 mm (0.354 inches by 0.354 inches)
8225: 18 mm by 18 mm (0.709 inches by 0.709 inches)
Resolution 0.0000394 inches / 0.001 mm
Linearity Better than 1.5%
Environment Protected from ambient light interference
Laser housing Aluminum
Inclinometer Internal, fully automatic
Inclinometer resolution Better than 1°
Measurement axes 6 total, 2 displacement and 1 rotational axis per laser
head
Operating temperature 0° to 115° F (-17.8° C to 45° C)
Storage temperature 0° to 140° F (-17.8° C to 60° C)°

C-1
Model 8215/8225 Laser Alignment Fixtures Specifications (continued)

Specification Description
Humidity 10 to 95%, non-condensing
Power management Auto “sleep” and “power down” modes
Battery Nickel cadmium
RF Operating Frequency 916.5 MHz
Models 821500 and 822500
Only
RF Operating Range 0 - 50 ft (0 - 15 m), typical
Models 821500 and 822500
Only
Battery life 3 - 4 hours continuous operation – 8 hours typical 1
Battery charging station Fully automatic super fast smart charger
(auto-switching, 110-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz)
Battery charging time 15 minutes
Laser to analyzer Cableless RF and/or direct cable connection
communication
Minimum separation Any positive separation (faces not touching)
Maximum separation 8215: 30 ft (9 m), 8225: 100 ft. (30.5 m)
Rotational Speed 2 seconds/rev maximum
Standard mounting Carbon steel base – thickness 0.75 in (19 mm)
bracket 2 (others available)
Minimum shaft diameter 0.625 in (16mm)
with standard bracket
Maximum shaft diameter 26 in (660 mm) – requires chain extension for shaft
with standard bracket 2 diameters above 8 in (200 mm)
Vertical clearance with 5.25 in (152 mm)
standard brackets 2
Calibration Calibration to NIST traceable standards
Weight of total system 33 lbs (15 kg) – includes laser heads, brackets, analyzer
and accessories
1
Based on 25% laser operation, 25% sleep mode, and 50% analyzer only

2
Other brackets are available for special applications

C-2 -
Mounting Posts (part number D23465) for Alignment
Brackets

The mounting post, used to secure the laser fixture to the mounting bracket (refer
to “Installing a Post” on page 2-27 for more information), can be used on the fol-
lowing brackets: Carbon Steel (B821007), Soft Mount/non-Rotational (A800052),
Narrow Mount (A8AA54), Quick Mount Narrow (A8AA55), Magnetic Mount
(A800056), and Magnetic Base for Straightness Measurements (A8AA50). The
mounting posts can also be used on the following extension blocks: 1-inch/25 mm
(B8100-EXT1), 2-inch/51 mm (B8100-EXT2), and 4-inch/102 mm (B8100-
EXT4).
If additional height is required to clear a coupling or other obstacle and additional
extension blocks are not available or cannot be used with the mounting bracket
being used, you may not have any choice but to make your own longer posts. Use
the following mechanical drawing for the required dimensions, except modify the
5.00 inch (127.0 mm) length to meet your requirements.

Mounting Posts (part number D23465) for Alignment Brackets C-3


Note
If possible, use extension blocks instead of longer mounting posts
since extension blocks offer a more stable bracket configuration,
resulting in more accurate, repeatable data. Extension blocks are
available only for B821007 and A800052 mounting brackets.

C-4 -
Appendix D

Accessories and Optional Products

Optional Items for Laser System


Part No. Description
A832001 ............... Mounting Chain extension, 2 ft (660 mm), A800052 soft-mount base
D22773 ................. Mounting Chain extension, 2 ft (660 mm), B821007 standard mounting base
800002 .................. Direct Connect extension cable, 8 ft (2.4m), with one straight and one right-angle
Lemo connectors
800003 .................. Direct Connect extension cable, 8 ft (2.4m), with straight Lemo connectors
8AA50 .................. Magnetic straightness fixtures (see 800056)
800052 .................. Non-rotational (soft-mount) alignment fixtures
B8100-EXT1 ........ 1-inch (25mm) extension block for B821007 and A800052 mounting bases
B8100-EXT2 ........ 2-inch (51mm) extension block for B821007 and A800052 mounting bases
B8100-EXT4 ........ 4-inch (102mm) extension block for B821007 and A800052 mounting bases
D23465 Mounting Posts for mounting bases and 8211 Battery Charger
8AA54 .................. Thin mounting brackets, 5/8 inch - 4 1/2 inches (15 - 115 mm) diameter shafts
8AA55 .................. Thin mounting brackets, 3/4 inch - 20 inches (19 - 510 mm) diameter shafts
800056 .................. Magnetic mounting base for couplings
821510 .................. 8215/8225 Direct Connect Cable, 5 ft (1.5m)
8215C2-PM .......... 8215/8225 Dual Pass Cable, 2 ft (660mm)

Other Accessories
Part No. Description
8JB-050................. Portable horizontal jackbolts kit; motor sizes 2 to 300 HP
8JB-100................. Portable horizontal jackbolts kit; motor sizes 300 HP+
8JB-200................. Portable horizontal jackbolts kit; motor sizes 2 to 300 HP+
See Price List ........ Precut stainless steel shims

D-1
Recommended Spare Parts*
Part No. Description
D22745.................. Chain Clip for B8221007 and A800052 mounting bases
8AA10................... CSI Tape Measure, 6 ft (2 m)

* Other spare parts are available upon request.

Analyzer Travel/Carrying Cases


Part No. Description
D24492.................. Hard shell case (locking) for analyzer and laser fixtures

Batteries/Analyzer Chargers
Part No. Description
D23465.................. Mounting posts for mounting bases and 8211 battery charger
8211....................... Laser head and analyzer fast battery charger
93140 .................... Analyzer battery charger/power supply, 100 to 250 VAC
65010 .................... three-conductor (120V) cable for 92140 battery charger/power supply
821102................... Analyzer to 8211 charger cable

Alignment Fixtures
Part No. Description
8215 ...................... RF Laser Alignment Fixtures with 10 mm by 10 mm PSD’s
8225 ...................... RF Laser Alignment Fixtures with 20 mm by 20 mm PSD’s

D-2 -
Customer Support
Emerson takes great pride in our customers and is committed to providing the
highest standard of customer support. Our number one priority is to provide
prompt and efficient service to all of our customers. To contact our Customer Sup-
port department, please call (865) 671-4274 (4CSI). To reach the Sales Support
department, dial (865) 675-2110 and ask our receptionists to direct your call.
To extend the level of support to Emerson customers, we have an electronic mail
system which is connected through the Internet directly to the Customer Support
group. The address is:
mhm.custserv@emersonprocess.com
Customer Support also has a Web page on the Internet. You can access it by visiting
our corporate Web page at:
http://www.mhm.assetweb.com
Once there, place your cursor over Expertise on the left column and click on
Product Support in the pop-up menu. There are links to specific information such
as TechNotes, Software Registration, and Maintenance Quotes. Also, the following
prompt provides a link to the Customer Support Web page.
Visit our Customer Service Site
for additional Customer Support
information.
Click on this option to access additional technical information and assistance for
Emerson products.

DoctorKnow™
The DoctorKnow system was originally developed to provide a means of transfer-
ring high volume, ever-changing technical information to support personnel at
Emerson. Because it was so successful, further enhancements were made so that it
could also be provided to Emerson customers. It now provides:
• A mechanism to FAX information to the customer (while on-line) and
• Direct access to the Customer Support Web page (through the Internet —
see previous section)

Customer Support D-3


Customer Support includes file transfer capabilities. Files can be uploaded to
ftp.compsys.com for Customer Support to download. Please contact Customer
Support for the username and password.

Reliability Services
Emerson provides a broad range of in-plant services including startups, database
troubleshooting and diagnostics. Our Machinery Health Services Group consists
of qualified individuals with experience in a variety of technologies and industries.
For information, call (865) 675-2400, ext. 2547.

D-4 -
Glossary

Accuracy
How close a measurement is to the absolute quantity being measured.

Alignment
Positioning two or more machines so that the rotational centerlines of their shafts
are co-linear under operating conditions.

Anchor Bolts (or Hold-down Bolts)


Bolts use to anchor or hold the machine to the base or foundation.

Angularity
The angle between two machine shaft centerlines; this angle is the same at any
point along either centerline. Normally specified in rise/run.

Axial Float (or End Float)


Movement of one shaft along its centerline due to the freedom of movement per-
mitted by a journal bearing or sleeve bearing. This adjustment should be set before
performing vertical and horizontal moves.

Backlash
Normally refers to the torsional play caused by the design or degraded condition
of a flexible coupling.

Baseplate
The surface (often made of steel plate or cast iron) to which the feet of a machine
are attached. The baseplate is normally mounted on a foundation and grout.

Baud Rate
Unit of speed for data transmission over a serial communications link.

Bolt Bound
The situation whereby the machine cannot be moved in the desired direction
(either horizontally or vertically) because of mounting bolt restrictions, or a limited
number of shims.

G-1
Brackets (or Fixtures)
Components that mount to machine shafts or couplings to measure the relative
position of the centerlines of two machines.

Coefficient of Thermal Expansion


The constant value or factor of expansion of a metal for a given increase in temper-
ature per length of the metal. This is different for each type of material.

Cold Alignment (or Static Alignment, or Primary Alignment)


Condition in which machines are normally aligned. Changes in off-line to on-line
running conditions should be allowed for during this procedure so that the
machine will “grow” into alignment during operation.

Co-linear
Two or more lines positioned in space with no offset or angularity between them.

Co-planar
Lying or acting in the same plane.

CPM
Cycles per minute. (Same as RPM.)

Current Job
The “job” that is currently active — the one that can be easily modified.

Dodd Bars
A secondary alignment method.

Dutchman
A tapered filler ring for squaring cocked flanges, or a ring of uniform thickness
used to fill pipe gaps.

End Float
See axial float.

Essinger Bars
A secondary alignment method, or method to measure off-line to on-line running
condition change.

G-2
Face-rim Method (or Rim-face Method)
A method of shaft alignment measurement where the indicators are mounted radi-
ally and axially on one machine or the other (not both).

Fixtures
See Brackets.

Foundation
The surface, often made of concrete, to which the machine baseplate is mounted,
often with grout between the baseplate and foundation to provide even support.

Frame Distortion Index


Method of measuring how much a Soft Foot condition will distort a machine
casting (casting distortion affects the alignment).

Frequency
Number of times an event repeats in a specific period of time.

Hertz
The measurement of frequency in cycles per second.

Hold-down Bolts
The bolts anchoring or holding the machine to the baseplate and foundation.

Inclinometer
A device that indicates the rotational position of shafts.

Induced Soft Foot


A type of soft foot that is caused by external forces (coupling, pipe strain, etc.)
acting on a machine independent of the foot to baseplate connection.

In-phase
When applied to alignment brackets, the term means the Move and Fixed brackets
make the same angle with the horizon at each point of measurement.

Jackscrew (or Jackbolt)


A bolt or screw attached to the base or foundation that is used to move or position
the machine (normally horizontally but sometimes vertically) which is being
moved.

G-3
Jackshaft
A long shaft used as a spacer between two machines.

Job
Usually identified with a number and description; represents data accumulated
during an individual alignment session.

Machinery Train
Three or more machines that must be aligned to one another.

Master
When used as a communications term, it is the unit that controls and determines
when data will be transferred.

Micrometer, Outside
Tool used to measure the thickness of shims.

Milliradian
A unit (normally metric) used to describe the angle of one machine shaft center-
line to the other. It is the equivalent of mils/inch. It can also be expressed as rise/
run (1° = 17.45 milliradians).

Mils
A unit of measure for displacement (thousandths of an inch).

Mils/Inch
A unit (normally English) used to describe the angle of one shaft centerline to the
other. It is equivalent to milliradians. It can also be expressed as rise/run (1° = 17.45
mils/inch).

Modem
A device that enables remote communications between the host computer and the
analyzer over telephone lines.

Notes
Specific observations that can be stored in each alignment job along with the col-
lected data. These observations can be predefined notes or user-defined notes that
have been created via the analyzer’s keypad, or a combination of the two methods.

G-4
Off-line to On-line Running Condition
Movement of shaft centerlines associated with (or due to) a change in pressures,
temperatures and other forces between the static and operating condition.

Offset
Distance between rotational centerlines at any given normal plane, usually mea-
sured at the coupling midpoint.

Perpendicular
At right angles (90°) to a given line or plane.

Pipe Strain
Casing and shaft distortion caused by improper pipe flange fitup.

Predictive Maintenance
Technology of periodically monitoring the actual condition of machines to dis-
cover faults, to determine probable time of breakdown, and to provide scheduled
downtime for repair that avoids excessive cost and lost production.

Primary Alignment
See Cold Alignment.

RBM
Reliability Base Maintenance — the modern maintenance management method
that integrates preventive, predictive, and proactive maintenance strategies. This
total management method not only improves detection methods but uses root
cause analyses to find and correct the actual cause(s) of the problems thereby elim-
inating unpredictable failures in the future.

Repeatability
The consistency (or variation) of readings and results between consecutive sets of
measurements.

Resolution
The smallest change or amount that a measurement system can detect.

Reverse Indicator Method


Method for taking shaft alignment reading with indicators mounted radially at
opposite ends of a spanned section (on each machine).

G-5
Rim and Face Method
See Face-rim Method.

Rise/Run
For smaller angles, the ratio obtained when the change in offset between two cen-
terlines is divided by the distance along either centerline (between the points of
offset measurement). In effect, it is the slope of one line in a plane compared to
another line in the same plane. Angularity is normally specified in mils/inch, or
milliradians which is rise/run.

Rotor
The part (or assembly of parts) of a machine that spins or revolves as a single unit.
For alignment purposes, the shafts of both machines are the rotors.

RS232
A serial, asynchronous communication standard; a type designation for cables that
are used to connect communications ports on host computer, analyzer, and tele-
phone modems.

Sag
Deflection due to gravity acting on a cantilevered or otherwise supported object.
Mechanical brackets always sag a certain amount. This sag must be corrected for if
machine moves are to be calculated correctly.

Secondary Alignment
The act of measuring off-line to on-line machine movement.

Shim
A thin piece of metal material inserted between the base and machine feet to pro-
duce precise vertical adjustments of the machine centerline.

Slave
When used as a communications term, it is the unit that is controlled when data is
transferred.

Soft Foot
A term used to describe any condition where tightening or loosening the bolt(s) of
a single foot distorts the machine frame. Also the name of a method used to mea-
sure this condition.

G-6
Spacers
A generic term for any coupling that has two flex planes separated by a connecting
shaft without bearings or other supports (between the flex points). Sometimes
called an insert or spider.

Spool Piece
Any piece of pipe or shafting which can be removed from a line of piping or
shafting without disturbing or disassembling any other components. The name
spool piece comes from the physical appearance of the piece, often a short cylinder
with flanges on the ends, that resembles a spool of string or thread.

Squishy Foot
A type of soft foot characterized by material (could be shims, paint, rust, grease, oil,
dirt, etc.) acting like a spring between the underside of the machine foot and the
baseplate contact area.

Static Alignment
See Cold Alignment.

Stored Job
A job that has been stored in memory. All the data related to that particular job will
then be available for activation.

TIR
Total Indicator Runout. The total movement in mils that an indicator would read
after the shaft is rotated 180° or 360°.

Thermal Growth
Movement of shaft centerlines associated with (or due to) a change in machinery
temperature between the static and
operating condition.

Thermal Profile
A secondary alignment method used to measure thermal growth.

Torsional Play
The relative rotation between two coupled shafts that will cause the fixtures to move
out of phase with each other (also called backlash).

G-7
Tolerance
The maximum permissible deviation from a specified alignment position, defining
the limits of offset at the coupling center and angularity.

UltraMgr
Machinery Health Manager’s database management software package used to
store technology specific information, such as alignment or balance job details.

Unassigned Job
A job that has not been assigned to stations and machines in the UltraMgr data-
base.

Wedge Shim
Use of several shims to fill the wedge shaped gap of a bent foot. Each shim is
inserted to a different depth so that a stair-step shaped support is built to better sup-
port the entire foot.

G-8
Index

Numerics operating temperature 2-18


8000-I, connecting 2-34 to 2-35 setup overview 2-18
LED Functionality 2-9
A
Auto Sweep 2-33, 2-44 M
machine alignment, causes of changes in A-6
B machine coupling
checking A-6
battery
correct A-6
usage, laser heads 2-16
machine foundation preparation A-5
block
manual, organization of the 1-1
adding 2-inch 2-48
model 8211 smart charger 2-11
completed 3-inch extension 2-49
model 8215/8225
mounting 1-inch 2-47
care and handling 2-10
bracket
fixtures checklist 2-6
mounting on coupling 2-50
modified jobs 3-197
mounting base
C attaching chain to 2-19
Case Studies 3-195 chain length table 2-51
chain clip, using the 2-26 excess chain 2-24 to 2-25
chain, extension kits 2-51 installing post in 2-27
Communication, RF 2-32 leveling 2-22
mounting on shaft >8-inches 2-51
D using chain clip 2-26
Direct Connect 2-37 mounting block
Dual Pass 2-9, 2-45 chain tightening range 2-21
vertical extension ranges 2-49
mounting sensor heads 2-28 to 2-31
L
laser beams, rough alignment 2-42 to 2-44
laser fixtures O
adjustment 2-41 operating precautions 2-17
interference with 2-18 optional accessories D-1

I-1
P compatibility 3-199
pipes database advantages 3-199
minimizing strain A-6 overview 3-199
thermal growth of A-6 UltraMgr/2120
preparing machine foundations A-5 overview 3-194 to ??
UltraMgr/FAST Bal II
R operating cases 3-195 to 3-196
replacing the sensor battery 2-12
rough alignment 2-42 to 2-44

S
screen
offset and angle 3-193, 3-201
sensor head
beginning installation 2-28
communication range 2-33
turning on 2-40
shaft alignment
common mistakes in A-2
early methods of A-2
examples A-3
major steps in A-1
overview A-1
pre-job preparation A-5
shaft misalignment
types of A-4
spare parts D-2

T
thermal growth A-6
different expansion rates A-7
Tolerances 3-193, 3-201
tolerances, Emerson recommended 3-202
types of shaft misalignment A-4

U
UltraMgr

I-2

Вам также может понравиться